JAN-701-901 Instruction Manual PDF

JAN-701/901M
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : service@jrcams.nl
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA0513B 01ETM ISO 9001, Certified
9001，ISO 14001 Certified
JAN. 2007 Edition 3 JRC Printedin
Printed in Japan
Japan
Cautions for High Voltage
High voltages, ranging from several hundreds to tens of thousands of volts, are used in
electronic apparatus, such as radio and radar instruments. These voltages are totally
harmless in most operations. However, touching a component inside the unit is very
dangerous. (Any person other than authorized service engineers should not service,
inspect, or adjust the unit.)
High voltages on the order of tens of thousand volts are most likely to cause instant
deaths from electrical shocks. At times, even voltages on the order of several hundred volts
could lead to electrocution. To defend against electrical shock hazards, don't put your hand
into the inside of apparatus. When you put in a hand unavoidably in case of urgent, it is
strongly suggested to turn off the power switch and allow the capacitors, etc. to discharge
with a wire having its one end positively grounded to remove residual charges. Before you
put your hand into the inside of apparatus, make sure that internal parts are no longer
charged. Extra protection is ensured by wearing dry cotton gloves at this time. Another
important precaution to observe is to keep one hand in your pocket at a time, instead of
using both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a secure footing to work on, as the secondary effects of
electrical shock hazards can be more serious. In the event of electrical shocks, disinfect the
burnt site completely and obtain medical care immediately.
Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

Electric Shock
When a victim of electric shock is found, turn off the power source and ground the circuit
immediately. If this is impossible, move the victim away from the unit as quick as possible
without touching him or her with bare hands. He or she can safely be moved if an insulating
material such as dry wood plate or cloth is used.
Breathing may stop if current flows through the respiration center of brain due to electric
shock. If the electric shock is not large, breathing can be restored by artificial respiration. A
victim of electric shock looks pale and his or her pulse may become very weak or stop,
resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity at worst. It is necessary to perform first aid
immediately.
Method of First-Aid Treatment
☆Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

Whenever a person is struck by an electrical shock, give the patient artificial respiration
immediately on the spot, unless it is absolutely necessary to move the patient for safety's
sake. Once started, artificial respiration should be continued rhythmically.
(1) Refrain from touching the patient carelessly as a result of the accident; the first-aider
could suffer from electrical shocks by himself or herself.
(2) Turn off the power calmly and certainly, and move the patient apart from the cable
gently.
(3) Call or send for a physician or ambulance immediately, or ask someone to call doctor.
(4) Lay the patient on the back, loosening the necktie, clothes, belts and so on.
(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

(b) Check the heartbeat by bringing your ear close to the patient's heart.
(c) Check for respiration by bringing your face or the back of your hand to the patient's
face.
(d) Check the size of patient's pupils.
(6) Opening the patient's mouth, remove artificial teeth, cigarettes, chewing gum, etc. if
any. With the patient's mouth open, stretch the tongue and insert a towel or the like into
the mouth to prevent the tongue from being withdrawn into the throat. (If the patient
clenches the teeth so tight that the mouth won't open, use a screwdriver or the like to
force the mouth open and then insert a towel or the like into the mouth.)
(7) Wipe off the mouth to prevent foaming mucus and saliva from accumulating.
☆Treatment to Give When the Patient Has a
Pulse Beating but Has Ceased to Breathe
＊Performing mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration - Fig. 1
(1) Bend the patient's face backward until it is directed to look back. (A pillow may be
placed under the neck.)
(2) Pull up the lower jaw to open up the airway. (to spread the airway)
(3) Pinching the patient's nose, breathe deeply and blow your breath into the patient's
mouth strongly, with care to close it completely. Then, move your mouth away and
take a deep breath, and blow into his or her mouth. Repeat blowing at 10 to 15 times
a minute (always with the patient's nostrils closed).
(4) Continue artificial respiration until natural respiration is restored.
(5) If the patient's mouth won't open easily, insert a pipe, such as one made of rubber or
vinyl, into either nostril. Then, take a deep breath and blow into the nostril through
the pipe, with the other nostril and the mouth completely closed.
(6) The patient may stand up abruptly upon recovering consciousness. Keep the patient
lying calmly, giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink (but not alcoholic
drink) to keep him or her warm.
Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

① (1) Lift the back part of the patient's
head. Support the forehead with one
of your hand and the neck with the
other hand.→①.
Many patients will have their airways
opened by lifting their head in this
way to ease mouth-to-mouth artificial
respiration.
②
(2) Closing the patient's mouth with your
mouth, press your cheek against the
patient's nose→②.
Alternatively, hold the patient's nose
with your finger to prevent air leak
→③.
③ (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Blow air into the patient's lungs until
chest is seen to rise. The first 10
breaths must be blown as fast as
possible.
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

☆Treatment to Give When the Patient Has No
Pulse Beating and Has Ceased to Breathe
＊Performing cardiac massage - Fig. 2
If the patient has no pulse beating, with the pupils open and no heartbeat being heard,
the patient has a cardiac arrest and requires immediate artificial respiration. Continue
this until a medical specialist arrives, and follow his or her directions after that.
(1) Putting one hand on about the lower one third of the patient's ribs and the other hand
over the back of the first, with your elbow fully stretched (with bended elbow, you
can’t press to the extent the patient’s ribs are depressed), apply your body weight to
the hands to press the patient's body until it is depressed about 2 cm (Repeat this
about 50 times a minute). (Cardiac massage.)
(2) If only one first-aider is available, perform a cardiac massage about 15 times and
then give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this sequence. If two
first-aiders are available, while one person performs a cardiac massage 15 times,
and the other should give mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration 2 times. Repeat this
sequence (combined cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration
method).
(3) Check the patient's pupils and feel the pulse from time to time. When the pupils are
restored to normal and the pulse begins to beat regularly, stop treating and keep the
patient calm while giving him or her coffee, tea or any other hot drink to keep him or
her warm while watching him or her carefully.
① ②
③ ④
Fig.2 Cardiac massage

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701/901M ECDIS.

This equipment is ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) meets
the performance standards of the IMO (International Maritime Organization) and the
IHO (International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to improve safety,
reduce fuel combustion, reduce voyage time and automate voyages.
● For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly
before use.
● Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
● This LCD uses 1,310,000 (JAN-701)/1,920,000 (JAN-901M) or more TFTs (Thin
Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is
brighter than usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent
characteristic of the TFT display technology.
● The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.
i
● Before Operation ●
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are
shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safely
and correctly and prevent any danger to you and / or to other
persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such
indications and their meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in

danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.
This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this
indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated
correctly.
Examples of pictorial indication

The △ mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (“Electric Shock” in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
The mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action (“Disassembling Prohibited” in
Disassembling the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
The ● mark represents instruction.

Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power plug” in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
ii
● Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ●
Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Touching the high-voltage section inside will cause an electric shock.
Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Otherwise, a fire, an electric shock, or a malfunction may occur.
Do not place a glass or cup containing water, etc., or a small metal object on
this equipment.
If water or such object gets inside, a fire, an electrical shock, or a malfunction
may occur.
In case water or a metal object gets inside the equipment, turn off the power
immediately, unplug the power supply cable from an electric outlet, and contact
our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire, an
electric shock or a malfunction.
In case you find smoke, strange smell or unusual heat coming from the
equipment, turn off the power immediately, unplug the power supply cable from
an electric outlet, and contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office
to request servicing.
Keeping the equipment in operation under such condition may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship position,
the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the real one,
and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position panel
on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message “Position Shift” is
displayed in the message display area. Check these indications, and cancel the
offset function if necessary.
iii
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and
crossing safety contour.
Otherwise, accidents may result.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic sailing, be
sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the [TURN] key
while keeping the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents may
result.
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on

their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your skin,
wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes. If you
find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the liquid gets
in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15
minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
iv
Do not use or leave the equipment under direct sunlight or in the temperatures
above 55°C for a long time.
Otherwise, a fire or a malfunction may occur.
Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

Otherwise, heat may accumulate inside to cause a fire or a malfunction.
This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

● If no backup measures are taken, such as using another ECDIS unit for
confirmation, be sure to use official marine charts together with this
equipment to make any navigational decision.
● This equipment is not designed to assess the positional information
automatically for navigation.
The positional information should always be checked by the user against
such information from other sources.
Do not touch the equipment with hands or gloves wet with water.
Otherwise, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
Do not leave the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive after use.
Also, do not leave the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
Malfunctions of the drives may result.
● Do not place any object on the operation panel.

Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
● Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
v
Edit routes in accordance with the world geodetic system (WGS-84).
Use of routes edited with any other geodetic systems may cause accidents.
During sailing, be sure to check own ship’s position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or not.
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately turn off
the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local
office to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such as
thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface of the
equipment.
vi
Equipment Appearance
Stand-alone type (JAN-701M)
vii
Stand-alone type (JAN-901M)
viii
Flash-mount type
ix
Glossary
AIS : Automatic Identification System
ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.
ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.
AUTHORIZATION CODE : Encryption key for C-MAP Ed.2. Supplied by C-MAP Norway.
AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as
automatic sailing.
Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.
Cell Permit : A file containing an encryption key for S-63 chart. Supplied by UKHO,
PRIMAR STAVANGER, and Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of
Japan Coast Guard.
Chart Portfolio : Software to manage the charts. Imports and updates the charts.
C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.
C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.
CO. TO STEER : Course to steer. Heading command.
COG : Course Over Ground
Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.
Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.
DIST. : Distance
DR : Dead Reckoning
EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines
ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System
ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.
ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD : Estimated Time of Departure
F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.
x
GC : Great Circle
HDG : Ship’s heading
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard.
Publisher of ENC.
Import (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of enabling the chart supplied by Base CD to be displayed on
ECDIS.
Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints
LMT : Local Mean Time
LON : Longitude
Primary : Main positioning sensor.
PRIMAR STAVANGER : A Norwegian company supplying charts. Publisher of encrypted charts, S-63.
Range : An area of the chart displayed on the screen. Represented by one half of the
length of the chart display screen.
RL : Rhumb Line
Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.
S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.
S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme
SA Certificate file : An electronic file certifying the supplier of S-63 chart. Required for import/
update of S-63 chart.
Scale : The display scale.
SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart
Ship-avoiding operation : To operate the ship in order to avoid obstacles during automatic navigation,
regardless of the scheduled route.
SOG : Speed Over Ground
Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.
TCS : Track control systems
UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office
xi
Update (for Chart Portfolio) : A procedure of reflecting the update data supplied by Update CD on the
imported chart.
Update CD : Chart CD containing the chart data updated from Base CD. Base CD data has
been imported.
USER CODE : A user-specific code assigned by JRC. Required in using ARCS and S-63
charts.
UTC : Coordinated Universal Time
VRM : Variable Range Markers
WOL : Wheel Over Line
WOP : Wheel Over Point
WP : Waypoint
WP-WP : The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints.
XTD : Cross Track Distance
XTL : Cross Track Limit
xii
Contents
PREFACE .................................................................................................................................................... i
Before Operation......................................................................................................................................... ii
Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ................................................................................................... iii
Equipment Appearance............................................................................................................................. vii
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................... x
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Function.................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Features ................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Components ..........................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Construction ..........................................................................................................................1-7
1.5 System Configuration..........................................................................................................1-13
Chapter 2 Names and Functions
2.1 Function of Operation Panel and LCD brilliance control.......................................................2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen ..........................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Display Panel..............................................................................................................2-7
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar ..........................................................................................................2-12
Chapter 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS
3.1 Menu Operation ....................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu .............................................................................................3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ..............................................................................3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu ................................................................................3-4
3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu .....................................................................3-7
3.1.2 Various Panels............................................................................................................3-8
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters ..........................................................................3-10
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard...........................................................................3-10
3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard ....................................................................3-11
3.1.3.3 Numerical Input ...........................................................................................3-12
3.1.3.4 Character Input ...........................................................................................3-13
3.2 General Flowchart...............................................................................................................3-14
3.2.1 General Flowchart ....................................................................................................3-14
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing .................................................................................................3-15
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation.........................................................................................3-17
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER]) ..............................................................................................3-17
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu ......................................................................................3-18
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)..................................................3-19
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation ..............................................................................................3-21
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ...........................................................3-21
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT]).............................................................3-24
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])..............................................................3-25
3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR]) ...................................................................3-29
3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA]) ..................................3-31
3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations............................................3-37
3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive.............................................................3-38
3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP .............................................................................................3-39
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel ...........................................3-39
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu ..........................................................3-40
3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run .....................................................................................3-42
3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)............................................................3-45
3.6 Shifting the Chart.................................................................................................................3-47
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ...............................................................3-47
3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor ..................................................................3-48
3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor...................................................................3-49
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button .......................................................3-49
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position..........................................................3-50
3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ...................................................................3-51
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....................................3-51
3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only).........................................................................3-52
3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................3-53
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................................................3-54
3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) ........................................................................3-55
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)..........................................................3-55
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only) ..........................................................3-55
3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) .............................................................3-56
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only) ......................................................................3-57
3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)......................................................................3-58
3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ........................................................3-59
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ..................................................3-59
3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only).......................................................3-60
3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only)....................................3-61
3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) ...............................................................................3-62
3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only).....................................................................................3-66
3.10 Displaying a User Chart ....................................................................................................3-67
3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ...................................................................................3-68
3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting.................................................................................................3-69
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) ..........................................................................3-69
3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark.................................................................................3-71
3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark...............................................................................3-72
3.12.4 Highlighting.............................................................................................................3-73
3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines..........................................................................................3-74
3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects...........................................................................3-75
3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View) ...............................................3-78
3.14.1 Multi View Screen...................................................................................................3-78
3.14.2 Selecting an Area ...................................................................................................3-79
3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................................................3-80
3.15 Using the Analog Meter.....................................................................................................3-81
3.16 Own Ship’s Setting ([Ship] - [Option]) ...............................................................................3-82
3.16.1 Ship’s Shape ..........................................................................................................3-83
3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position............................................3-84
3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector......................................................................3-85
3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display ................................................................................3-86
3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line .................................................................................................3-87
3.17 Operating EBL/VRM..........................................................................................................3-88
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ...................................................3-88
3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu.....................................................................3-92
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option..................................................................3-92
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation .......................................................................................3-92
3.17.2.3 2-step Operation .......................................................................................3-97
3.18 Running Fix .....................................................................................................................3-101
3.19 Maneuver Curve..............................................................................................................3-102
3.20 Cross Bearing..................................................................................................................3-104
3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode......................................................................................3-106
3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode.........................................................................................3-108
3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only).......................................................3-109
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode.........................................................................................3-109
3.22 My Port List ..................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.1 Adding to My Port List .......................................................................................... 3-111
3.22.2 Deleting My Port List ............................................................................................3-112
3.23 Logbook...........................................................................................................................3-113
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook ........................................................................................3-113
3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options ......................................................................................3-116
3.24 Setting the Chart Options................................................................................................3-118
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.....................................................................3-118
3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options .................................................................................3-133
3.24.3 Setting Scales.......................................................................................................3-134
3.25 Setting the Alarm Options ...............................................................................................3-135
3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor............................................................................................3-137
3.27 Setting the View Options ([View])....................................................................................3-139
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options ..........................................................................................3-139
3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options....................................................................................3-140
3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options...............................................................................3-144
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options ......................................................................................3-144
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance .........................................................................................3-144
3.27.6 Setting Date/Time.................................................................................................3-145
3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position..............................................................................................3-146
3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor .....................................................................................3-148
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position ..........................................................................3-148
3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value....................................................................3-149
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset ...............................................................................................3-149
3.30 Printing Display (Only when Connected to a Printer)......................................................3-149
3.31 Saving the Screen (Only when Connected to Backup Device).......................................3-150
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the Navigation & Planning) .......................................3-150
Chapter 4 Route Planning
4.1 Route Planning......................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options ..........................................................................................4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor.......................................................................4-8
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode........................................................................................4-8
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ..............................4-9
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor...........................................................4-13
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) .....................................................4-15
4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor) ...............................................4-25
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files ..................................................................................4-26
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files..................................................................................4-27
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor.................................................................4-28
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode..................................................................................4-28
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)....................4-29
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing) ..........................4-34
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)................................................4-36
4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) ...........................................4-50
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files ..................................................................................4-51
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files..................................................................................4-52
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.....................................4-53
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route................................................................................................4-56
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart .................................................................................................4-56
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route ..........................................................................................4-57
Chapter 5 Chart Editing
5.1 Chart Edit Mode ....................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions ................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu.....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 Button Functions.........................................................................................................5-8
5.3 Operation Flowchart..............................................................................................................5-9
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit ..............................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart .........................................................................5-11
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart....................................................................................5-14
5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts ...................................................................................5-16
5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts .................................................................................5-17
5.4 Manual Update Operation ...................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update.............................................................................................5-18
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects............................................................5-19
5.5 Entering Objects..................................................................................................................5-22
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types.............................................................................................5-24
5.5.2 Entering Objects .......................................................................................................5-25
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)....................................5-38
Chapter 6 Automatic Sailing
6.1 Automatic Sailing System......................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning).......................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm..........................................................................6-3
6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing ................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation..................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP ................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing................................................................................................6-7
6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing ..............................................................................6-8
Chapter 7 Tool Menu/ Maintenance Menu
7.1 File Manager .........................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Chart Abbreviations...............................................................................................................7-5
7.3 Setting the User Key .............................................................................................................7-6
7.4 Connection ............................................................................................................................7-7
7.5 Sensor ...................................................................................................................................7-8
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position ..................................................................7-8
7.5.2 Bearing Setting ...........................................................................................................7-9
7.5.3 Speed Setting .............................................................................................................7-9
7.5.4 Depth Setting............................................................................................................7-10
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting.........................................................................................7-10
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting ...............................................................................7-10
7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only) ......................................................................................................7-11
Chapter 8 Chart Portfolio
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio .......................................................................................8-2
8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen ...........................................................................................................8-5
8.3 Overview Flow Chart...........................................................................................................8-20
8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart ................................................................................................8-20
8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart ....................................................................................8-26
8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio........................................................8-26
8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio ......................................................8-30
8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart ....................................................................................8-34
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file..........................................................................8-34
8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file .....................................................................8-37
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit ...................................................................................8-38
8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart....................................................................................8-41
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart ..................................................................................8-44
8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart ..................................................................................8-48
8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS .......................................................................................8-48
8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ...............................................................8-49
8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio ..............................................................8-56
8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart........................................................................8-59
8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2 .............................................................................8-59
8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio ...........................................8-61
8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio..........................................8-66
8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3..................................................................................8-68
8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3 .............................................................................8-68
8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio ...........................................8-69
8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio..........................................8-81
8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail ...................................................8-83
8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2).................................................................................8-93
8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)............................................8-93
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)....................................................................8-93
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)..........................................................................8-93
8.5 Filtering the Source Charts (For C-MAP Ed.2)....................................................................8-94
8.6 View Operations ..................................................................................................................8-95
8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information]) .................................................................8-95
8.6.2 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)................................................8-96
8.6.3 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio.............................................8-96
8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio ...................................................................................................8-97
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update.................................................................................8-97
8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options ..........................................................................................8-98
8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options ......................................................................................8-99
8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options ......................................................................................8-100
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options ........................................................................................8-100
8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options ................................................................................8-101
Chapter 9 Playback
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback ...............................................................................................9-2
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data .............................................................................................9-8
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
10.1 Confirming Alarm...............................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Daily Maintenance.............................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57) ...............................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Gray Scale..............................................................................................................10-6
10.3 Replacing Consumables ...................................................................................................10-7
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input .................................................................10-7
10.5 User Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................................10-8
10.5.1 Backup Option ........................................................................................................10-8
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information....................................................................................10-10
10.6 Troubleshooting...............................................................................................................10-11
Chapter 11 After-Sales Service
11.1 Maintenance Service .........................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts.......................................................................................11-2
11.3 When Asking for Service ...................................................................................................11-2
11.4 Checks and Inspection ......................................................................................................11-2
Chapter 12 Disposal
12.1 Disposal of the Product .....................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module ...................................................................................................12-2
Chapter 13 Specifications
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal ....................................................................................................13-2
Chapter 14 Reference
14.1 Alarm Fuction ....................................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information.......................................................................................14-6
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart...........................................................................14-6
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ................................................................14-7
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart ....................................................................14-8
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System...................................................................................14-12
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export .....................................................14-13
14.4.1 File Types .............................................................................................................14-13
14.4.2 File Names ...........................................................................................................14-13
14.4.3 CSV File Data Structure .......................................................................................14-13
14.4.3.1 Route Files ..............................................................................................14-14
14.4.3.2 User Chart Files ......................................................................................14-19
14.4.3.3 Logbook File............................................................................................14-31
Index
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
Repair Request Form
1
Overview
1-1
1.1 Function
This equipment is navigation system with ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System)
functions conforming to the “ECDIS Performance Standards” adopted in Resolution A.817 at the general
assembly of the IMO. Consequently, this equipment can become the core of an integrated navigation
system (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports one-man bridge operation.
• Safe sailing
• Energy-saved sailing
ECDIS
• Compliance with the ECDIS defined by the IHO/IMO
• Availability of S-57edition 3.0/3.1 (supporting S-63) format, C-MAP Ed.2/Ed.3, and ARCS as chart
databases (when C-MAP Ed3 is used with the optional C-MAP Ed3 upgrade kit)
• Own ship’s track display and planned-route display on the electronic chart
• Automatic checking of the safety contours and dangerous areas of the own ship (not available for
ARCS)
• ARPA target display and AIS target display on the electronic chart
• Superimpose display of radar echo on the electronic chart (when ECDIS is used with the optional
radar overlay kit)
• True/Relative motion display
• North-up/Course-up display
• Display of route information such as latitude/longitude at destinations, bearings/distances up to
waypoints, and planned arrival time
• Availability of two EBLs/VRMs
• Writing of memos with alphabetic characters into the electronic chart
• Display of information such as the date/time, current position, heading, and ship’s speed
• Display specifications
Size: 18.1-inch color LCD (JAN-701)
23.1-inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Selection of colors (conforming to the IMO/IHO) suitable for the daytime, nighttime, dawn, and
dusk Display of the symbols and colors recommended by the IHO
Navigation Planning
• Editing of route information
Addition, deletion, and modification of waypoints on the electronic chart
Calculation of the distance between waypoints, bearings, and planned arrival time
Up to 512 waypoints per route
Checking on the crossing of the safety contours and dangerous areas on created routes
Automatic sailing functions

• Route tracking
• Course change
Alarm functions
• Safety depth crossing alarm
• Dangerous areas crossing alarm
• Waypoint arrival alarm
• XTD alarm
Logging functions
• Logging of navigation information onto the hard disk
• Own ship’s playback using logged data
1 Overview 1-2
1.2 Features
This ECDIS has the following features:
• Displays vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS
• Safe navigation ensured by the crossing alarm function for safety contours and dangerous areas
and the guard ring function (not available for ARCS)
• Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the
connected Navtex receiver
• Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing
• Ease of user chart creation
• Multi view function to display two charts at a time (not available for C-MAP Ed.3 and ARCS)
• Wide range view in addition to single or multi view
• Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor
• Creation of alternative route during voyage
• Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot
• Playback function to check the voyage
• S-57 update portfolio
1-3 1 Overview
1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.
• Components
Name Model Quantity Comment

Bridge Display Terminal
(JAN-701) NCD-4224 1 Main Unit
(JAN-901M) NCD-4308
(JAN-701) NWZ-147-AC
Display Panel 1 Included in the main unit
(JAN-901M) NWZ-158
Either type A or B is included in the main
Operation panel (type A) NCE-7721-A － unit.
Type A has an automatic sailing function.
Operation panel (type B) NCE-7721-B － Type B does not have an automatic sailing
function.
Processing unit (JAN-701) NDC-1264 1 Included in the main unit
(JAN-901M) NDC-1309 1 Included in the main unit
Instruction Manual (Japanese) 7ZPNA0512 1
Instruction Manual (English) 7ZPNA0513 1
Analog Interface Kit MPXP32636 1 Option NOTE 1)
Serial Interface Kit MPXP32637 1 Option NOTE 2)
Radar overlay kit MPXP32691 1 Option
C-MAP Ed3 Upgrade kit MPXP33436 1 Option
Optional keyboard NCE-5009 1
(JAN-701) MPXP33088
Canvas cover 1 Option
(JAN-901M) MPXP33089
(JAN-701) MPOL30350
Lightproof hood 1 Option
(JAN-901M) MPOL30345
Spare Parts (CMJ-462 NSK I/F) 7ZZNA0400 1 12pcs, 0.5A
CD Cleaner
Accessary 7ZZNA0426 1 Packing in 1box
FD Cleaner
Note 1) The analog interface kit (MPXP32636) includes the serial interface kit (MPXP32637). See
the packing list included with the kit.
Note 2) If only the serial interface kit is needed and the analog interface is not necessary, then please
request MPXP32637. See the packing list included with the kit.
1 Overview 1-4
1-5
Analog I/F Kit
MPXP32636
1 Overview
1 Overview
1-6
Serial I/F Kit
MPXP32637
1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below.
Mass: Approx. 125 kg Cable Inlet
NCD-4224 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-701)
1-7 1 Overview
Mass: Approx. 150kg Cable Inlet
NCD-4308 Bridge Display Terminal (JAN-901M)
1 Overview 1-8
1-9
MASS:APPROX. 85kg
Flash-mount type
NDC-1264 Processing Unit
1 Overview
1 Overview
MASS:APPROX. 10kg
1-10
Flash-mount type
NWZ-147-AC 18.1” LCD Unit
MASS:APPROX. 25kg
1-11
Flash-mount type
NWZ-158 Display Panel
1 Overview
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg NCE7721-A Operation Panel (Type A)
MASS:APPROX. 3.1kg NCE7721-B Operation Panel (Type B)
1 Overview 1-12
1.5 System Configuration
The following diagram shows an example system configuration connected with this equipment.
When ECDIS mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the sensor.
When Conning Display mode is used, it displays navigation data received from the external ECDIS
connected with the equipment.
1-13 1 Overview
2
Names
and
Functions
2-1
This equipment can be operated both from the Operation panel and the display.
2.1 Function of Operation Panel

and LCD brilliance control
(1) Function of operation panel
Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 show the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each
part on the operation panel.
○
1 ○
28
○
29
○
3
○
2
○
4 ○
5 ○
6 ○
7 ○
8 ○
25
○
9 ○
10
○
23 ○
24 ○
26 ○
27
○
11 ○
14 ○
15 ○
16
○
12 ○
17 ○
18 ○
19
○
13 ○
20 ○
21 ○
22
Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel (Type A)
○
1
○
3
○
2
○
4 ○
5 ○
6 ○
7 ○
8 ○
25
○
9 ○
10
○
23 ○
24 ○
26 ○
27
○
11 ○
14 ○
15 ○
16
○
12 ○
17 ○
18 ○
19
○
13 ○
20 ○
21 ○
22
Fig. 2.2 Operation Panel (Type B)
2 Names and Functions 2-2

Table 2.1 Names and Functions
No. Name Function
1 POWER Turns the power on.
2 PWR FAIL Indicates the AC power supply error.
(See 10.4 “The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.”)
3 PWR ACK Stops the alarm at occurrence of PWR FAIL.
(See 10.4 “The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input.”)
4 VIDEO*1 Adjusts the brightness of radar echoes.
*1
5 RAIN Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
*1
6 SEA Suppresses sea clutter.
*1
7 GAIN Adjusts receiver gain.
8 RANGE ＋ Range up.
－ Range down.
*1
9 RADAR Turns ON/OFF the radar echo display on the chart.
10 ALARM ACK Press to acknowledge an alarm.
11 ROUTE PLAN Starts/ends route the route planning function (table editor).
12 DAY/NIGHT Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the bridge.
13 PANEL Dims the operation panel in five steps.
14 TGT DATA Displays the detailed information of a selected ARPA or AIS target.
15 AIS ACT Activate a selected AIS target.
16 AIS IN-ACT Deactivate a selected AIS target.
17 AIS/ARPA Selects AIS/ARPA display.
18 INFO Reads out the attributes of each object on the chart.
19 HOME Returns the own ship’s position into the display.
20 USER One of the following user-registered functions is executed:
(See 7.3 “Setting the User Key.”)
- Starting the route graphic editor
- Starting the chart editor
- Displaying the chart option setting screen
- Displaying the own ship’s option setting screen
- Adding to the port name list
- Changing the ARCS’s active panel
- Loading ARCS’s low resolution
- Displaying the logbook
- Printing the screen contents
21 OPTION 1*2 Makes copies of the screen contents and save them into the external equipment.
*2
22 OPTION 2 Starts the software keyboard.
23 EBL1/EBL2 Turns the Electronic Bearing Line ON/OFF, and operates the Electronic
Bearing Line.
24 VRM1/VRM2 Turns the Variable Range Marker ON/OFF, and operates the Variable
Range Marker.
25 TRACK BALL The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen for position
designation, selection of buttons on the display panel, menu
designation, etc.
26 LEFT BUTTON Used for selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as “left-click” in this book.
27 RIGHT BUTTON Used for confirming alarms.
Pressing the right button is written as “right-click” in this book.
2-3 2 Names and Functions

Table 2.1 Names and Functions (Continued)
No. Name Function
*3
28 AUTO GUARD Used in combination with the [AUTO] or [TURN] switches.
*4
SAILING AUTO Starts or stops automatic sailing.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
TURN*4 Starts turning.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
SET CO. This switch is also used to create maneuver curves.
*3
29 JOYSTICK Use this switch to create maneuver curves.
*1: Effective only when an optional radar overlay kit is installed.
*2: May not be effective depending on the system configuration used.
*3: Effective only when type A operation panel is used.
*4: Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.
(2) LCD brilliance control

The screen’s brightness can be adjusted by using the brilliance control on the display panel.
By keeping the brilliance control pressed, the screen’ s brightness will be adjusted to an optimal
condition automatically.
• JAN-701
Brilliance control
• JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Note:
• For JAN-901M, pressing the brilliance control will automatically adjust the screen’ s brightness to
an optimal condition.
When the adjustment is completed, “AUTO ADJUSTMENT COMPLETE” will appear on the display.
Press the brilliance control again to erase the indication.

2.2 Function of the Screen
The screen consists of two areas, the chart display area and display panel (information display area). The
menu title bar appears when this equipment enters the menu mode.
Menu title bar <MENU

<MENU
North arrow mark
Chart display area Display panel
Message display area 1 Message display area 2
Chart Display Area:

The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS
charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the primary position
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the secondary position
• Head line
• Primary position track and time label
• Secondary position track
• EBL/VRM markers
• RADAR echo
• Other ship symbols, vectors and ship’s track (when ARPA/AIS is installed)
• etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.
Message Display Area 1:

When an alarm occurs, an alarm display button (see 2.2.1 “Display Panel”) will flash, and the details of
the alarm will be displayed at the same time. When multiple alarms occur at the same time, the detailed
alarm information will be displayed alternately for fixed intervals. When an alarm is released (see 3.3.7
“How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”), the details of the alarm will no longer be displayed.
Message Display Area 2:

Position shifts and other caution messages will be displayed. These messages will be displayed as long
as the condition persists. No alarms will occur even if a message is displayed in this area.

Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that
will be frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.
Memo: All of the button functions in the display panel can be accomplished by the menu operation.
Menu Title Bar:

When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens on top of the screen
to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the [MENU] button once again or left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title
bar.

2.2.1 Display Panel
The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or
ARCS. The following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS.
Name of positioning system

Name of primary system position
Geodetic system name
[MENU] button used to enter the menu mode.
Course and speed of primary (The vector of the vessel’s motion

over the ground.)
Ship’s heading
Log speed (speed through the water)
Course to steer (CTS) (It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.)
Vector time
Depth
Date and time of Local Mean Time. ( ) shows the time zone.
Current primary system position (Latitude/Longitude)
Route name being selected (“UNLOAD” appears if nothing is

selected. Drop-down list shows all route names.)
Next waypoint being selected (Drop-down list shows the selectable

waypoints manually.)
Auto sailing status. See “Auto Sailing Status Panel” on page 2-11.
Information panel for “To WP”, “XTD”, “Dest WP”, “Route” and
“Drift”. See page 2-10 and 2-11.
The contents of this CHART panel differs depending on the chart

type. For S-57/C-MAP, see page 2-8. For ARCS, see page 2-9.
Alarm display buttons. Up to 3 alarm names and the number of alarms are
displayed. e.g. ARR (Arrival) To see all alarms, left-click the [Alarm List]
button. You will see the detailed description of each alarm.
Software keyboard.
See 3.1.3.2 “Use of the Software Keyboard.”
Displays the system name from which information is received.

RADAR 1 ARPA 1 AIS
AIS (Automatic Identifica-
tion System)
ARPA 1, ARPA2, or ARPA 1/2
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2
Coordinate of the cursor position (“C” : Cursor)
Bearing and distance from own ship

(1) CHART Panel
CHART Panel for S-57/C-MAP
When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. Selected port
name position will be displayed on the chart.
When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level selection

buttons. When the button is lit in green, corresponding SENC is
displayed.
BASE: Shows basic information such as geographic area. (This is not
intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
STANDARD:
Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
!: Shows all objects that belong to standard information.
OTHER: Shows all information.
The selecting Drop-down list is lit in green.
Scale of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all

available scales.)
Range of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all

available ranges.)
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)

True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is
automatically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic
objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.
Azimuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)

North Up: The chart always orients north.
Course Up: Your ship’s heading always faces up on the screen.
(The chart rotates. This is effective in the relative mode.)
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified amount
using the degree specifying box on this panel.
Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth “Rotation”.
When Fix button is clicked (in red), the currently displayed chart is
held even if zoom in or zoom out are used.
HOME: Displays your ship on the screen.
Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber
band.
Wide View: You can display additional wide range view in the
display panel area, which makes you easier to see
your ship’s geometric position.
Zoom In: You can magnify the range.

Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.

CHART Panel for ARCS
Note:
• Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME]
buttons is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.
Displays the geodetic system of the chart.
Displays the original scale of the chart.
Scale of the chart being displayed
Range of the chart being displayed
Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)

True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is
automatically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the
geographic objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.
Chart offset values
Selects a larger chart.
Selects a smaller chart.
Opens the “Select Chart” panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want. See, 3.8.4 “Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)”.

(2) To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and Drift Panels
To WP:
Distance from the ship to the “to waypoint”
Bearing from the ship to the “to waypoint”
Estimated Time To Go to the “to waypoint”
Estimated Time of Arrival at the “to waypoint”
Speed to arrive at the “to waypoint”by the planned time
XTD:
Track deviation (Deviation from the direct route.)
Cross Track Limit (Port side)
Cross Track Limit (Starboard side)
Dest WP:
Select from Actual Speed / Calc. Ave. Speed / Calc. ETA

Actual Speed:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the actual speed
Calc. Ave. Speed:
Displays speed to the destination No. by the setting of
estimated time of arrival
Calc. ETA:
Displays time to go and estimated time of arrival to the
destination No. by the setting of speed
Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)
Speed to arrive at the destined waypoint by the estimated time of arrival
Distance from own ship to the waypoint. (Not the straight-line

distance, but the total distance of the leg.)
Time To Go to the destined waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the destined waypoint

Route:
New Course
To WP
[New Course]
Own Ship
Drift:
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors.
(3) Auto Sailing Status Panel

The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:
Displays the autopilot steering mode.

See the autopilot instruction manual for descriptions of the various
steering modes.
BLANK: Not Auto Sailing BLANK: Not Auto Sailing

MAN: Manual Turning mode KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg
AUTO: Auto Turning mode DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation
NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing (The route has not been loaded, or a POS1, Gyro,
Log, or A/P alarm has occurred.)
READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
TCS: TCS type Auto Sailing
Note:
• To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be connected.

2.2.2 Menu Title Bar
When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens and you can access
to various menus.
[MENU] Button
The following shows the menu trees:
Table 2.2 Menu Tree

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference
(1) Cursor (1) Scroll 3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area 3.8
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix 3.18
(8) Remove Running Fix 3.18
(9) ARPA Manual Acq －
(1) ARPA Release －
(2) Activate AIS 3.3.9
(3) Deactivate AIS 3.3.9
(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
(5) Other Information 3.13
(6) Maneuver Curve 3.19
(7) Remove Maneuver Curve 3.19
(8) Cross Bearing... 3.20
(0) Option... 3.17.2.1
(2) Chart (1) Marking/Highlighting (1) Event-Mark 3.12.1
(2) Information Mark 3.12.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.12.3
(4) Highlight 3.12.4
(5) Delete Event-Mark... 3.12.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position... 3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List... 3.22.1
(3) My Port List... 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(3) ARCS (1) Select Chart under Cursor 3.8.3
(2) Select Chart from all... 3.8.4

Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued
(2) Chart (3) Change Active Panel 3.8.5
(4) Load Low Resolution 3.8.6
(5) Note and Diagram 3.8.8
(6) Temporary and Preliminary 3.8.9
(7) Adjust Datum Offset... 3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation... 3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart... 3.9
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart... 3.10
(2) Chart Editor... 5.3
(3) Unselect User Charts 3.10
(6) Manual UpDating... 5.1, 5.4.2
(7) Scale (1) Select Scale 3.7.4
(2) Select Range 3.7.3
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(8) Azimuth (1) North Up 3.21.2
(2) Course Up 3.21.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(2) Accept S-57 Updates 3.11
(3) Print Display 3.30
(4) Save Screen 3.31
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS... 3.24.1
(2) Other Charts... 3.24.2
(3) Scale... 3.24.3
(3) Ship (1) Adjust (1) Cursor 3.28.1
(2) Enter Position... 3.28.2
(3) Enter Offset... 3.28.3
(4) Clear Offset 3.29
(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor (1) Create Monitoring Circle 3.26
(2) Clear Monitoring Circle 3.26
(0) Option... 3.16, 3.16.1 -- 3.16.5
(4) View (1) Day-Night (1) Day Bright 3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback 3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback 3.3.6
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(6) Panel Dimmer 3.3.5
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8

(4) View (4) Guard Zone1 －
(5) Guard Zone2 －
(3) ARPA / AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) Internal ARPA －
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release ALL －
(7) Deactivate All AIS 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(9) Select List 3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter 3.15
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(6) Multi View (1) Single View 3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom 3.14.1
(3) Right Left 3.14.1
(4) Right Top View 3.14.1
(5) Left Top View 3.14.1
(6) Right Bottom View 3.14.1
(7) Left Bottom View 3.14.1
(8) Select Area 3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View 3.14.3
(0) Option (1) Radar... 3.27.1
(2) Guard Zone －
(3) ARPA/AIS... 3.27.2
(4) Display Panel 3.15
(5) Logbook... 3.23.2
(6) Voyage Distance Clear 3.27.5
(7) Date / Time... 3.27.6
(5) Route (1) Select Route... 3.4.2
(2) Unload Route 3.4.2
(3) Select Next WP... 3.4.2
(4) Create Alternate Route 4.2.1, 4.2.2
(5) Planning (1) Table Editor 4.1.2
(2) Graphic Editor 4.1.3
(6) Calculate Distance to Run 3.4.3
(0) Option... 4.1.1
(6) Auto Sail (1) Start... 6.3.2
(2) Stop 6.3.3
(3) Start Avoiding －
(4) Stop Avoiding －
(0) Option... 6.2
(7) Alarm (1) List... 3.3.7
(2) History... 3.3.7
(0) Option... 3.3.5, 3.25

(8) Tool (1) File Manager... 7.1
(2) Chart Portfolio... (1) Create 8.1
(2) Top Window 8.1
(3) Chart Abbreviation 7.2
(4) Navigation Data Graphs... －
(5) Set User Key 7.3
(6) Bilingual －
(9) Maintenance (1) Connection... 7.4
(2) Sensors... 7.5
(3) Color Test... 7.6
(0) For Engineer Installation manual
(0) Exit 3.32

3
Basic
Operation
of ECDIS
3-1
● Do not place any object on the operation panel.
Avoid placing anything extremely hot, in particular, as this may deform the
panel.
● Do not apply any undue shock on the operation panel, trackball and dials.
Otherwise, a malfunction may result.
Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as
[xxxx] in this book.
Example:
• [RADAR] key (on the operation panel)
• [MENU] button (on the display panel)
• [(1) Cursor] (menu name)
(2) Menu operation description:

The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:。
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
• You will learn how to access to a menu later.
Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 “Menu
Operation”.
The flowchart described in 3.2 “General Flowchart” will give you general procedure for this
equipment.
3 Basic Operation of ECDIS 3-2

3.1 Menu Operation
To operate this equipment, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here.
Also, major panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers
and letters are described.
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu

3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball
Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball:
The trackball is used to move the cursor on the
Trackball
screen for position designation, selection of buttons
(Moves the cursor.)
on the display panel, menu designation, etc.
Left button:
Left button Right button Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart,
(Left-click) (Right-click) or selecting a button, menus and options on the
screen. Pressing the left button is written as
“left-click” in this book.
Right button (Shortcut menu selection button):

Used for displaying a shortcut menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as “right-click” in
this book.
Major cursors
Cross Cursor Lens Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart. Appears when area zoom function is
selected. The rubber band can be
drawn to magnify an area.
Marking Cursor
Appears while in User Chart Edit/
Manual Update mode and Route Hand Cursor
Graphic mode. Used to add objects Appears when the cursor is moved
and WPs. while pressing and holding down the
left button in the chart area. You can
Edit Cursor grip and move the chart freely.
Appears while in User Chart Edit/
Manual Update mode and Route Box Cursor
Graphic mode. Used to change Indicates the position on the chart
objects and WPs. while in User Chart Edit/Manual
Update mode and Route Graphic
Arrow Cursor (Pointer) mode.
Indicates the position on the display
panel, menu title bar and panel
(dialogue box, etc.)
3-3 3 Basic Operation of ECDIS

3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu
As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:

(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
(3) Selecting the submenu/options
(1) Opening the menu

For opening the menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel of the screen as follows:
The menu title bar appears on the upper part of the screen.
[Menu Title Bar]
Step-by-step operation to press the [MENU] button on the display panel:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the [MENU] button.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [MENU] button.
Then the menu title bar will open.
Explained as “Left-click the [MENU] button”.
The menu title bar opens.
How to close the menu:

Left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel or left-click at any position on the chart.

(2) Selecting [(2) Chart] ([MENU] - [(2) Chart])
Select the [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.
Step-by-step operation to select [(2) Chart] menu:

1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(2) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(2) Chart] menu will open.
Explained as “Left-click [(2) Chart]”.
The [(2) Chart] menu opens.

(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the “Location/Attribute” panel will open.
Shifting the cursor

will also open the
submenu.
How to Close the Panel:

Left-click the [OK] button or [Cancel] button.
[OK]: Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]: Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu
You may use the shortcut menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).
Example 1: By right-clicking on the chart display
Right-clicking the chart may

open a shortcut menu.
Left-click a menu item you want.

e.g. “Zoom In”.
Example 2: By right-clicking on the chart display while performing operation
Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.
Left-click “Abort” to abort the current operation step.

3.1.2 Various Panels
The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.
Value entry box

You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the arrow mark or the entry
box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry
box, if any, or the [ENT] key.
Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the
dropdown list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the
list.
Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 “How to Enter Numbers and Letters”.

Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.
Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark (✔) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.
Option button (Radio button)

You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark ( ) shows the
selected item.
List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark (✔) shows that the selected item
is set to ON.
To scroll up/down the list:

• Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button.
• While left-clicking the scroll bar, move the
trackball so that it moves upward or downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right side or at

the bottom of the panel.
Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters
You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric graphic
buttons on the display or optional full key board.
3.1.3.1 Use of the PS/2 Keyboard

Note:
• You cannot enter letters using the PS/2 keyboard in case an optional PS/2 keyboard is not
installed.
1) Loosen the 2 screws in front of the equipment that fasten the PS/2 keyboard.
Screws (2 places)
2) Pull out the PS/2 keyboard.
Put in the PS/2 keyboard in the reverse order and fix it firmly when you place it.

3.1.3.2 Use of the Software Keyboard
Left-click [Keyboard] of [Alarm List] button.
On the operation panel
Press the [OPTION2] key.
The software keyboard will be displayed.
[Keyboard]
Like the PS/2 keyboard, numbers/characters/symbols can be input by clicking the keys on the software
keyboard. To switch between uppercase and lowercase characters, left-click the [Shift] button. While the
[Shift]+[Lock] button is enabled, the uppercase input mode is active, and the [Shift]+[Lock] button is
displayed on a yellowish green background. To close the software keyboard, left-click the [Close]
button.
[Shift] button [Close] button
Uppercase and lowercase characters are switched each

time the [Shift] button is left-clicked.
Note:
• The software keyboard may not be displayed depending on the system configuration used.

3.1.3.3 Numerical Input
This arrow mark shows the entry box.
Procedure to enter value:

1) Left-click the arrow mark or the value entry box.
35°32.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
2) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [3] and then [3].
33°32.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
Black underlines
3) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [4] and then [5].
33°45.028'N
Black underlines
Red underline
Black underlines
4) Change the value “998” in the same way.

5) To fix the entry, press the [ENT] key.
How to switch between “N (North)” and “S (South)”:

To change the line under “N” into red, point the cursor at “N” by moving the trackball and left-click.
To switch the letter “N” and “S” by turnes, press [0] to [9] or [A] to [Z].
• The same procedure applies to “E (East)” and “W (West)”.

3.1.3.4 Character Input
This section explains the character input rules.
● To input an uppercase character from the software keyboard, click the [Shift] button to enable, and
then click the character button.
Example: Input [M].
Click the [Shift] button, confirm that the [Shift] button is enabled turning royal blue and that
the button display has changed to the uppercase mode, and then click the [M] button.
● To input an uppercase character from the optional PS/2 keyboard, press the character key while
holding down the [Shift] key.
Example: Input [M].
Press the [M] key while holding down the [Shift] key.
Example of inputting the characters “Note 1”:
Text box
1) Left-click on the arrow mark or in the text box. The cursor will appear in the text box.
2) With the software keyboard, enable the [Shift] button and left-click the [N] button to input [N].
With the PS/2 keyboard, press the [N] key to input [N] while holding down the [Shift] key.
Character cursor
3) Press the [O] button to input “o.”
4) Press the [T] button to input “t.”
5) Press the [E] button to input “e.”
6) Press the [1] button, and press the [ENTER] key to fix the entry.
1
Editing of input characters:

● If you input “Nott” by mistake, press the [Backspace/<-] button.
The last-input “t” will be deleted. The rightmost character is deleted each time the [Backspace/<-]
button is pressed.
● If you input “Notte” by mistake, turn the trackball to insert the cursor between the “tt,” and left-click.
• Then, press the [Backspace/<-] button to delete the first-input “t.” Alternatively, press the [Delete]
button to delete the second “t.”
The character following the cursor is deleted each time the [Delete] button is pressed.

3.2 General Flowchart
The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-901 and the flowchart for sailing.
3.2.1 General Flowchart

［[Startup Menu] [Startup Screen]
Power switch ON
Startup Menu
selection
Input ARCS PIN

(ARCS only)
Startup Screen [MENU] button
[Navigation & Planning Screen]

Navigation & Planning
Screen The [Startup Screen] will be
automatically displayed if [ ]
Adjustments is left-clicked or no operation is
Display panel
•Screen brightness conducted for 10 seconds.
(Information
•Operation panel brightness
display area)
•Sound volume
•Radar echo, etc.
(For detailed description, see 3.2.2 “Flowchart for

Sailing Sailing”.) Chart display area
(From the menu )

ROUTE selection
Operation panel
WP selection Rout Planning
operation
• Table editing
• Graphical editing
Display panel
Sailing monitoring operation User chart making/
• Alarm monitor
editing
(Arrival, Route, etc.) [MENU]
Menu operation
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 chart updating)
Create alternate
route
Exit and shutdown Press the [POWER] key
Power switch OFF

3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing
Sailing start Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be heard.
Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] button on the display
panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see 3.3.7 “How to
Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”.)
• Select a route name you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
Select ROUTE
shown.)
Select To WP
• Select the To WP (for example “1” or “AUTO SELECT”).
Move you ship to the sea • Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.
Your ship's symbol
Ship's bearing
To WP
Note:
• Be sure that the background color is not
sky blue. If it is sky blue, your ship position
is shifted by the offset function. In this
case, return its color to gray. See, 3.29
“Canceling the Ship Offset”.
Bearing to the To WP
About Auto Sailing:

You can use automatic sailing when using together with an Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see
chapter 6 “Automatic Sailing”.

Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued
Route monitoring • When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated “next
("ARR (Arrival)" occurs WP,” and an “ARR (arrival)” alarm occurs.
when arrived at the WP.) After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
It repeats itself until the

ship arrives at the last
WP before the final
destination.
When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination, "ROUTE" alarm
Arrived at the final destination will occur.
("ROUTE" alarm occurs.)
After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.
Unload the route Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
End of sailing

3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation
How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here.
Note that, when you turn the power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination
sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.
3.3.1 Power ON ([POWER])

Press the [POWER] key.
The power turns on, and the [PWR] key will light. After a short while, the startup menu will be displayed.
Do not turn on the power of the equipment with a floppy disk inserted in the
floppy disk drive.
The equipment will not start normally.
[POWER] key
When ON: Lighting

3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu
The power turns on, and the [POWER] key will light. After a short while, the Startup menu will be
displayed.
You can select one of items.
●Navigation & Planning
If [ ] is left-clicked, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the Navigation & Planning screen
will be displayed.
●Chart Portfolio
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See chapter
8 “Chart Portfolio”.)
●Playback
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio screen. (See chapter
8 “Chart Portfolio”.)
●Color Pattern
Displays the S-57 chart color pattern. (See 10.2.1 “Color Pattern (S-57)”)
●Gray Scale
Displays the gray scale for the color test. (See 10.2.2 “Gray Scale”)
Note:
• The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10 seconds.
[Startup Menu]

3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)
1) If ARCS has been installed, the “ARCS PIN” panel will be displayed after [Navigation &
Planning] is selected in the Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button.
The [Startup screen] will be displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is
left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN” panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS
has not been installed, however, the “ARCS PIN” panel will not be displayed. The [Startup
screen] will be displayed instead.
Note:
• ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct
ARCS PIN is inputted on the “ARCS PIN”
panel.
• ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel]
button is left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN”
panel.
• The “ARCS PIN” panel is displayed only
once after [Navigation & Planning] is
selected.
To show the “ARCS PIN” panel again after
left-clicking [Cancel], turn off the power of
ECDIS, and then, turn it on again to resume
the startup procedure.
• ARCS will not be displayed after its contract
term has expired.
Note:
• Use the software keyboard or PS/2
keyboard to input ARCS PIN.
• Be sure to carefully read the caution
displayed on the startup screen.
[Startup Screen]

2) After the Startup screen appears, the Navigation & Planning screen will be displayed after a
short while.
[Navigation & Planning Screen (Example)]

3.3.4 Power OFF Operation
The power is turned off and the [POWER] key light goes out.
[POWER] key
When OFF: Unlit
Note:
• If the [POWER] key is pressed during Navigation & Planning, the [Startup Menu] will be displayed
momentarily, but the power will eventually be turn off.
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume

Perform the following adjustments as required.
(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])

Adjust the Brilliance control on the LCD monitor to adjust the brightness on the screen.
• JAN-701 • JAN-901M
Brilliance control
Brilliance control

(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])
Key operation:
1) On the operation panel
Press the [PANEL] key.
Each time you press the key, the brightness changes.
You can adjust the brightness in five steps.
Menu operation:
1) In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] - [(6) Panel Dimmer] in that order.
The “Panel” panel will appear.
2) The panel brightness is changed in five steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Panel Dimmer] button.
(3) Volume Adjustment

Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart editing menu
The “Alarm List Option” panel will appear.

2) The alarm volume is changed in seven steps by left-clicking the [Adjust Volume] button.*1
3) Set the output of sound. Volume is a setting value of the [Adjust Volume] button.
“OFF1” or “OFF2” is used to connect with the One Touch Alarm System. Usually use the level
in “DE-FAULT”.
Sound Level
Alarm
DEFAULT OFF1 OFF2
AUTO ✔ － ✔
CALL ✔ － ✔
Setup ✔ － ✔
A/P ✔ － ✔
POS1 ✔ － ✔
POS2 ✔ － ✔
JUMP ✔ － ✔
DIFF ✔ －－
GYRO ✔ － ✔
LOG ✔ － ✔
LowSP ✔ － ✔
The sound level of OFF2
ARR ✔ －－
varies depending on the
OffCo ✔ － ✔
setting during installa-
XTE ✔ －－
tion. *2
Route ✔ －－
Radar ✔ － ✔
ARPA ✔ － ✔
Chart ✔ － ✔
ARCS ✔ － ✔
SfCnt ✔ －－
AREA ✔ － ✔
DNG ✔ －－
Anch ✔ － ✔
Timer ✔ － ✔
HARD ✔ －－
✔ : Alarm sounds.
－ : Alarm will not sound.
*1 The volume of key click sound remains the same regardless of the sound level setting.
*2 The sound level of OFF2 varies depending on the setting between this equipment and the
Watch Alarm System during installation.
While relay output to the Watch Alarm System is set, the alarm does not sound.

3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])
You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the
bridge. Select one of the following display colors
●Day Bright
●Day Whiteback (For S-57/C-MAP only)
●Day Blackback
●Dusk (For S-57/C-MAP only)
●Night
Key operation:
Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key.
Each time you press the key, the display color changes.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order, and then select one of items you
want.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order.
The ✔ mark will be attached to the selected item.
In the following screen, [(1) Day Bright] is selected.
When you select one of items, the menu closes and the display color of the screen will be
changed.
Note:
• When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed
information difficult to read/see.

3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])
When an alarm occurs, a buzzer sound and the alarm button on the display panel blinks to notify the
operator of an alarm. At the same time, the details of the alarm are displayed in Message Display Area
1. When multiple alarms occur at the same time, the alarm display will change at a fixed interval. To
notify the alarm, three alarm buttons and the [Alarm List] button are used. The three buttons are used to
display the abbreviated name of the alarm. While the [Alarm List] button is used to open the Alarm
panel to see the details of the alarm.
After confirming the contents of the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or left-click
the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm. The details of alarms that have been stopped
will not be displayed in Message Display Area 1. You can display the history of alarms by using the
menu operation. (See 3.23 “Logbook”)
Note:
• Do not stop the alarm unless you confirmed its cause.
Memo: For alarm settings, see 3.25 “Setting the Alarm Options”.
(1) When no alarm is found

If no alarm is found, only the [Alarm List] button is displayed and the button lights in green.
Nothing is displayed here.
Lights in green.
(2) When an alarm occurs

The alarm and the [Alarm List] button blink in red and an alarm sounds.
Up to three alarms can be displayed here.
Blinks in red.
Shows the number of alarms.
(3) Stopping the blinking alarm

1) Confirm what kind of alarm has occurred.
Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
The blinking alarm will stay lit.
- Left-clicking the alarm button (e.g. [ARR]) on the display panel will also stop the alarm.
To confirm the alarm contents, see (4) “Opening the alarm list” in page 3-27.
Blinks in red. Blinks in red. Stays lit in red. Stays lit in red.
or
Left-click the alarm
button (e.g. [ARR])

Example:
If an XTE (Cross Track Error) occurs, the XTE alarm occurs and the [XTE] button blinks in red.
Blinking stops when you press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or when you
left-click the [XTE] button on the display panel, and the [XTE] button stays in red.
When the ship enters the limit, the [XTE] alarm is released and the alarm name “XTE”
disappears from the button.
Also, if the ship enters the limit during blinking the alarm, the alarm is released.
Note:
• The alarm lit or blining in red disappears only when the alarm cause is removed.
2) If two or more alarms have occurred, confirm the cause of alarms and press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel repeatedly until all alarms stop.
• Left-clicking the alarm button repeatedly will also stop the alarms.
To stop the blinking alarms, you can repeatedly left-click the left-most alarm button. (As you
press the left-most alarm button, the alarm not yet stopped will shift to the left for easy alarm
stopping operation.)

(4) Opening the alarm list
1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the “Alarm List” panel opens.
• If you open the “Alarm List” panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the “Alarm List”
also blinks.
After confirmation, you can stop the blinking alarm by left-clicking the alarm button in the
“Alarm List”. The color of the left-clicked button stays lit in red.
You can also open the “Alarm List” panel from the menu:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm List” panel.
Button blinks in red:

The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Button stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.
Button in green: No alarm.
Button in gray (inactive button):

The alarm does not occur in the current system configuration.

(5) Displaying the alarm history table
You can display the alarm history on the sailing.
Note:
• The alarm history is cleared once [Navigation & Planning] exits. To check the past alarm
lists, see 3.23 “Logbook”.
Menu operation:
Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(6) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Then, the “Alarm History” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm History” panel.
• Alarm: Alarm category

• Message: Detailed description of the alarm
• Date/Time: Date when the alarm is acknowledged
• Acknowledge: Date when the alarm is checked
• Remove: Date when the causes of the alarms are removed

3.3.8 Displaying the Radar Image ([RADAR])
You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on
the operation panel.
Note:
• To display a radar image, the optional rader board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar
image must be sent from the radar system.
• It is not possible to display the image from the Radar in chart conversion by “Chart Portfolio”.
• If the radar system displays a short-range image, and a long-range image on the ECDIS at the
same time, the radar image on the ECDIS may be distorted.
• While the radar image is displayed, the display range can be changed in 10 steps (0.5/0.75/1.5/3/6/
12/24/48/96/120nm).
• For ARCS, the available display range differs depending on the chart displayed. If a display range
beyond 120nm is selected, the radar image will be turned off automatically.
Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.27.1 “Setting Radar Options”.
(1) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].
The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.
When the radar image is turned ON, the display range rings for radar echoes are shown in red.
Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:

Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.
Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.

(2) Radar display ON/OFF from the operation panel
Press the [RADAR] key.
The image from the radar selected by the menu operation above will be superimposed on the chart.
To clear the image, press the key again.
(3) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)
Note:
• If menu panel adjustment ([(4) View] -[(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] “Rader Option” panel) is
selected, the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to activate the
dials. For details, see 3.27.1 “Setting Radar Options”.
[VIDEO]: Adjusting the brightness of radar echoes

The [VIDEO] dial adjusts the brightness of radar echoes. Turning the [VIDEO] dial to the right
increases the brightness. Adjust to the best brightness to view radar echoes.
[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter

The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in
images of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also
reduces sea clutter. So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep
this dial turned as far as possible to the left.
[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter

The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the
[SEA] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small
boats.
[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity

The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the
right increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be
observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the
contrast and makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely
packed targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets.

3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([AIS/ARPA])
You can turn ON/OFF the ARPA/AIS target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the
menu.
Notes:
• ARPA information is displayed only when it is received from the ARPA radar system.
• AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS receiver.
• For ARPA/AIS target settings, see 3.27.2 “Setting ARPA/AIS Options”.
(1) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF using the operation panel

Press the [AIS/ARPA] key.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.
(2) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF from the menu

ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS can be independently selected. Selecting “ALL” can turns ON and OFF
ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS displays at the same time.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5)
ALL] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(4) AIS], or - [(5)
ALL] in that order.
Each time you select [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], or [(4) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(5) ALL], items [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], and [(4) AIS] are simultaneously
turned ON and OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached.

(3) Opening the ARPA/AIS list
Note that the items “Bearing”, “Distance”, “CPA” and “TCPA” in the table are the filtered value by the
ARPA/AIS option settings. See 3.27.2 “Setting ARPA/AIS Options”.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(8) ALL List] in that order.
The “ARPA/AIS List” panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
• Left-click one of the tabs, to open the “ARPA - Port”, “ARPA-Starboard”, or “AIS” list.
When you opened “AIS” panel, the [View AIS Detail] button becomes active.
• Left-click the [Close] button to close the “ARPA/AIS List” panel.
List items:
The items are the same for ARPA-Port, ARPA-Starboard and AIS. The P1, P2, etc. are the target
number.
• Bearing: Bearing to the ARPA/AIS target
• Distance: Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
• Heading: Heading of the ARPA/AIS target
• Course: Course of the ARPA/AIS target
• Speed: Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
• Position of the ARPA/AIS target
• CPA (Closest Point of Approach)
• TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach)
• Status: Status of the ARPA/AIS target

[View AIS Detail] button function:
You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this button, the “AIS Information” panel will open.
• Left-click the [Close] button to close the “AIS Information” panel.
- Ship’s Name: Name of the AIS target ship

- MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
- Status: Status of the AIS target
Sleeping
Activate
Lost
- Nav. Status: Navigation status of the AIS target
0: UNDER WAY USING ENGINE: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
- Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
- IMO No.: 9-digit number
- CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
- TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
- Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: Undefined
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System

7: Surveyed: Measuring type
8-15: Not used: Not used
- Position Accuracy: 0: Low, 1: High
- Ship’s Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer, or a width
of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A vessel that is
dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in military
operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment): Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels defined by
the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships
For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE
For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
- Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
- Distance: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
- Course: Bearing of the AIS target
- Speed: Speed of the AIS target
- Length: Length of the AIS target
- Beam: Beam of the AIS target
- Draft: Draft of the AIS target
- Heading: Heading of the AIS target
- Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
- Destination: Destination of the AIS target
- ETA:ETA of AIS target

(4) Activating and Deactivating AIS Targets ([AIS ACT] / [AIS IN-ACT])
The default for AIS targets is display in the inactive state. The procedures below are used for
activating and deactivating AIS targets.
Activating:
Press the [AIS ACT] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Activate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Activate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is not active, then left-click on it. The
AIS target will become active, the status will be changed to active, and the vector will be
displayed.
Deactivating:
Press the [AIS IN-ACT] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) Deactivate AIS] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Deactivate AIS] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor will change to a box cursor.
2) Move the cursor with the track ball to an AIS target that is active, then left-click on it. The AIS
target will become inactive, and the vector will not be displayed.
Inactive Active
Deactivating all:
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(7) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(6) Deactivate All AIS] in that order.
All AIS targets will be deactivated, and the vectors will not be displayed.

(5) Panel Display of ARPA/AIS Target
Left-click on the ARPA/AIS target displayed on the screen so that ARPA/AIS information will be
displayed on the “Selected Target” panel.

Press the [TGT DATA] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) Other Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the ARPA/AIS target, and then left-click.
The “Selected Target” panel will open and ARPA/AIS target information will be displayed.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(9) Select List] in that order.
If you wish to have the “Selected Target” panel open in advance,
- Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the “Selected Target” panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
- To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] button provided in each panel. If there is a panel
below the deleted panel, it moves up by one.
Target Label:
Name of the ARPA/AIS target
Speed:
Bearing:
Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
Bearing towards the ARPA/AIS target
CPA:
Distance:
Closest point of approach to
Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
the AIS target
TCPA: Course:
Time to closest point of Course to the ARPA/AIS target
approach to the AIS target
[Additional] tab
[Common] tab
[AIS Detail] button: Name:

When a panel is displaying AIS Name of the AIS target (not
target information, the “AIS displayed for ARPA targets)
Information” panel will also be
Position:
displayed (see page 3-33 for AIS
“detailed information”). Current position of the ARPA/AIS target
[Release] button: Status:
Release the selected target. Current status of the ARPA/AIS target

3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations
If the power does not turn off, then hold it down for approximately 10 seconds to turn it off.
[POWER] key
After a while, press the [POWER] key on the operation panel to turn ON the system again.

3.3.11 Using the CD Drive and Floppy Disk Drive
Opening the panel on the front of the main unit will allow you to use the CD drive and floppy disk drive.
Floppy disk drive CD drive
Eject button: Use to open

and close the tray.
Access lamp: Will light green
when the writing to or reading
from a floppy disk. Access lamp: Will light green
when information is being read
from the CD.
Eject button: Use to eject a

floppy disk.
Note:
• Do not remove a floppy disk from the floppy disk drive when the access lamp is on.

3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP
When you start sailing, select the ROUTE and To WP as follows: Note that the route file extension shows
the route type. More specifically, the extension “.rtn” is used for Normal type and “.rta” is used for ANTS
type.
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel

(1) Selecting the route using the display panel
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list.
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on
the chart.
• The initial route status is “UNLOAD”.
Deleting the route:

To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the
ROUTE list, and then left-click “UNLOAD”.
• The selected route is deleted from the screen.
Notes:
• If the scheduled route is on floppy disk or on the navigation workstation, you can copy it to
hard disk using the File Manager. See 7.1 “File Manager”.
(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel

As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.
Automatic selection (Auto Select):

The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this
waypoint, the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.

2) Left-click the “AUTO SELECT”.

Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.

2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the
selected route, left-click “1” in the “To WP” drop-down
list.
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu

(1) Selecting the route from the menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order. The “Select Route” panel
opens.
2) Select the route by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected route is
displayed on the chart. Name of this route is displayed on the “ROUTE” panel of the display
panel.
• Left-clicking the [Display WP List] button will open the “Select Next WP” panel. For this panel
operation, see the next page.
To unload the selected route:

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Unload Route] in that order.
Then, the route disappears from the chart and the “ROUTE” panel displays “UNLOAD”.
- You can also delete the route from the screen by selecting “UNLOAD” in the “ROUTE” panel.

(2) Selecting the waypoint from the menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(3) Select Next WP] in that order.
The “Select Next WP” panel opens.
2) Select the WP you want by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected
WP is displayed on the “To WP” panel of the display panel.

3.4.3 Calculating Distance to Run
You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP with the calculator
(“Calculating Distance” panel).

Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(6) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the “Calculating Distance” panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way Point], [Picked Point], or
[Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or [Own Ship], select the WP number you want
from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by
left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or [Picked Point]. If
you have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you want from the WP No. drop-down list.
If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the
route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated, and the calculation
result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the [Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.] [Resultant]

Example use of [Calculate Distance] panel:
• When selecting [Way Point]
Select [Way Point] and an arbitrary WP No.
The calculation result is displayed.
The route between the selected WPs is shown in green.
• When selecting [Picked Point]
Select [Picked Point], and left-click an arbitrary Own ship position

point on the route.
The route from the arbitrary point to WP No. 02 you have selected is shown in green.

• When selecting [Own Ship]
Own ship position
Select [Own Ship].
Select WP to go through.
The route from the own ship position to WP No. 03 via selected WP is shown in green.

3.5 Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three
object categories, display base, standard display, and all other information. You can change the object
category using the display panel.
Display Base: Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ship’s
safety contour.
Standard Display: Objects less important than display base, such as drying line, indication of fixed and floating
aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other: Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and
details of all isolated dangers.
Note:
• The initial chart screen status is “Standard Display”. For safety for sailing, use the standard display
or other information display, and not the display base.
You can change the object category by left-clicking the [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] button
on the display panel.
The illuminating button in green is the selected one. The [BASE] button is always lit.
1) Left-click either button as follows:
During sailing, select [STANDARD] or [OTHER].

Illuminated in green when selected
Left-click [STANDARD] ［Left-click [OTHER]
Left-click [BASE] Left-click [STANDARD]
• You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [STANDARD] and
[OTHER] display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should
be displayed.
will display all objects that belong to standard display and that have been
set for display. will display all objects that belong to standard display.
For selection of object display, see 3.24.1 “Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.”
About the display in the chart area: You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are
used to make up the chart display. For example, standard display
consists of the display base and information (objects) for Layer
EVENT mark, ect.
standard display. This means that the display base is the basic
Objects of "OTHER"
one layer and the information for standard display is another Layer
layer, and the standard display is made up by overlapping both Objects of "STANDARD"
layers. Layer
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event Objects of "BASE"
Layer
mark, EBL/VRM, radar image, etc.
Standard Display: Base and standard display are lit in green.

Other: Base, standard display and other are lit in green.

[BASE display example]
[STANDARD display example]
[OTHER display example]
Notes:
• The display will be in gray without displaying a chart when a corresponding chart does not exist in
the display area, when a chart exists with only a part of data, or when the display scale does not
match the chart scale. In this case, change the scale to check for a chart.

3.6 Shifting the Chart
The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
●[HOME] button
●Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
●Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
●[PORT LIST] button
●Using the position entry panel
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button

At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to
advance. This function will be helpful, if you have lost your ship on the chart.
Key operation:
Press the [HOME] key.
Menu operation:
1) On the display panel
Left-click the [HOME] button.
- You can also perform the operation from the menu.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.
Your ship will return to a

position in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.
Own ship symbol
[Screen Display of Home Position]

3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor
You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then,
the position becomes the center of the chart.
For the detailed explanation of Motion mode, see 3.21 “Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode”.
True Motion:
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of
the chart.
2) Left-click at that position.
Cross cursor intersecting point
[Moving to the Center of the Screen]
Note:
• If the cursor is not the cross cursor (e.g. lens cursor), select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Scroll]
to return the cursor to the cross cursor. Right-clicking and selecting the shortcut menu
“Abort” will also return the cursor to the cross cursor.
Relative Motion:
You can shift the location of ship display within the chart view.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the location you want to set it the ship display.
2) Left-click at that position.
[Moving the location of ship display]

3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor
You can grip the chart and move it freely.
1) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
2) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart. At this time the cursor changes
to the hand cursor
Hand cursor
Note:
• If the ship is out of chart view, motion mode change to free automatically.
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button

If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the
registered scale.
• To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] button.
Note:
• Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.22.1 “Adding to
My Port List”.
(1) Button operation to jump to the port

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button.
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.
Registered position as a port

(2) Menu operation to jump to the port
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(3) My Port List] in that order.
The “Marked Position” panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.
- To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
- To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] button.
- To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position

You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
• To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The “Enter Position” panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the
[OK] button.
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the
designated position.

3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
●Zoom area function using the rubber band ([Zoom Area])
●Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]/Menu/Shortcut menu)
●Range selection (Range drop-down list)
●Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band

(S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the
operation panel, display panel , or menu.
1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:
On the display panel
Left-click the [Zoom Area] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
• Right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom Area] from the shortcut menu.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area “A” you want to enlarge, and
left-click there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area “B” you want to enlarge,
and left-click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
• After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.
Selected area
[Zooming area using the rubber band]
Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area.
Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions, charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed.
When a displayable scale range is assigned to an original scale of a chart and when this original scale
is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless there are other displayable charts.
This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as a reference. This chart
will be displayed when charts are zoomed out to a scale of 1:1,500,000 or smaller.

3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out]
menu.
(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or
the scale set by the system.
- Select range or scale for the zooming method.
- For switchable ranges, see 3.7.3 “Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only).” For scales, see
3.7.4 “Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).”
(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel

Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] button.
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount
set by the system.
(3) Zooming in/out from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3)
Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing
menu, User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3)
Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Each time you select the menu, the chart is
zoomed in or out by the amount set by the
system.
Or the same result can be achieved by
right-clicking on the chart, then selecting [Zoom
In]/[Zoom Out] from the shortcut menu.
Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale occurs
if the displayed chart is more than double in size than the
original data. The vertical lines as seen in the figure on the
right will be displayed on the “chart” and will appear to notify
lower chart accuracy and clarity.
The vertical lines will not display if the size has been made
larger (double or more) through proper operation. Warning lines for overscaling

3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the range using the display panel

Left-click the range switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the range in the list. The color of indicator left side of range switching drop-down list
changes green.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.
Zoomed out
Zoomed in
(2) Switching the range from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Available ranges are displayed.
- You cannot select the inactive range. Also, this
range is locked to the radar range, so that it
cannot be changed to active.
2) Left-click the range value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the
range you have selected.
Inactive range

3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.
(1) Switching the scale using the display panel

Left-click the scale switching drop-down list button.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
(2) Switching the scale using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Available scales are displayed.
2) Left-click the scale value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
Note:
• To enable or disable the selectable scales,
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Scale] in that order.
For details, see 3.24.3 “Setting Scales”. Disabled scale will be displayed inactively (faintly).
Zoomed out
Zoomed in

3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
●High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
●Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] buttons on the display panel,
[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] in the shortcut menu)
●Various options accessible from the menu
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)

When you use a low resolution chart, you can display the high resolution area with the cross cursor.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
2) Left-click the cross cursor. Then the high resolution area is displayed on the screen with the
left-clicked position centered.
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)

In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the
[RANGE+/-] key on the operation panel.

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key.
On the display panel

Left-click the [Larger Chart] or [Smaller Chart] button.
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.
In the normal menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] from the shortcut menu.
Note:
• An error message may be displayed when you switch a larger or smaller chart. For details of
error messages, see 14.2.1 “Alarm Information of ARCS Chart”.

3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Select Chart under Cursor] from the shortcut menu.
Move the cursor to the desired chart with the track ball, then left-click to open the [Select Chart]
panel.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
• If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
Note:
• When a chart is not displayed but a corresponding chart is displayed in the display area, the area
where a chart exists will be displayed in blue and the area where a chart does not exist will be
displayed in gray.

3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)
You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all] in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
• If Preview is turned on, a low resolution chart of the temporarily chosen chart will be displayed.
You can open the “Select Chart” panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the
display panel.

3.8.5 Changing Active Panels (ARCS Only)
A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Change Active Panel] from the shortcut menu.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.
Blue square
[Selected chart]

3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Load Low Resolution] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.
3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)

1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and select the “High Resolution Area” from the shortcut menu
by left-clicking it. Then, the orange square frame with the lens cursor appears. The area
surrounded by the orange frame shows the are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify the area to be magnified and left-click the cursor.
Orange frame
[Magnified chart: High resolution chart]

3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.。

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Note and Diagram] from the shortcut menu.
The “Note and Diagram” panel opens.
2) When the desired items are selected, the notes and diagrams for the corresponding chart are
displayed. The panel can be closed with the [Close] button, and the chart will return to the
original display position.
Note:
• The note and diagram information is included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such information, the notes and diagrams will not be displayed.

3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice
(ARCS Only)
You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary] in that order.
The “Temporary and Preliminary” panel opens.
• Depending on the chart used, the items may not be displayed on the panel.
2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the “Information” panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is
displayed as shown in the picture.
• “Temporary and Preliminary Notices” can be displayed only when the chart has been updated.
Note:
• The temporary and preliminary notices are included in the ARCS chart. If the chart used does not
include such notices, they will not be displayed.

3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)
(1) Entering offset
Note:
• Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.
You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The “Chart Shift” panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK] button.
3) When the dialogue is opened, the current offset value specified by the user is displayed.
The offset value can be cleared with the [Clear] button.
• If an offset value is already input or an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, then that
value will be displayed in the [Chart Shift] panel.
• When an offset value for WGS-84 is set in the chart data, pressing the [Clear] button will return
the display to that value.

Using the Cursor:
1) In the “Chart Shift” panel, left-click the [by Cursor] button.
The cursor type changes.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange line
to determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the “Chart Shift” panel. (You can edit the
value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Orange Line
Cursor
The chart will move the specified offset value. The chart offset value display section will be
displayed in blue, and “Chart Shift” will be displayed in Message Display Area 2 of the screen.
Also, the shift amount will be displayed in the display panel.
“Chart Shift” display Shift amount

(2) Transforming the datum
You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ship’s position to the WGS-84 system.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The “Change Datum” panel opens.
2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:

• Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
• Left-click the [Ship Position] button to enter the own ship’s position.
• Left-click the [by Cursor] button and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the
position is entered.
3) Left-click the “Geodetic Datum From” drop-down button, then select the geodetic system of the
conversion source from the list.
The geodetic system will be converted, and the position after shifting and offset value will be
displayed.
4) After confirming the position after shifting and the offset displayed in the [Chart Shift] box,
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The chart will move by the offset value, and the offset display section of the chart will be
displayed in blue. “Chart” will be displayed in the message display area of the screen.

Note:
Chart position for the WGS84 system
Chart position for the local

geodetic system
∆X, ∆Y: Offset value for WGS-84
• When ∆X and ∆Y are contained in the chart data, the geodetic system is converted automatically,
and the chart is displayed inclusive of these offset values. At this time, the chart position for the
primary geodetic system is displayed in blue on the display panel, and “Chart Shift To WGS-84” is
displayed in the screen message area.
In such a case, the geodetic system conversion function will be deactivated even if offset values
are set in the “Change Datum” panel and the [OK] button is left-clicked, and the message “The
Datum is already WGS-84” will be displayed on the panel.

3.9 Selecting a S-57 Chart (S-57 Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be
monitored at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57 Chart] in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The “Select Chart” panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
By pressing the [HOME] button on the display, you can display the chart on which your ship is.

3.10 Displaying a User Chart
You can display a user chart you have made.
Note:
• Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See chapter 5 “Chart
Editing”.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.
2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.
To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Unselect User Charts] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart
You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart
here in Navigation & Planning screen or you merge it when importing with the Chart Portfolio is selectable
in the Chart Portfolio setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see 8.7.1 “[S-57] Accepting Chart Update”.
1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to [STANDARD] or [OTHER] and not [BASE].
[STANDARD] or [OTHER] is selected.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The “Accept Updates” panel opens.
3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.

If you want to display and check the updating objects, left-click the [Show] button.
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.
Accept updating
objects by left-clicking
the [OK] button.
Updating objects will be The updating objects are merged

displayed in red. with the original chart and its color is
changed from red to normal one.
4) Left-click the [OK] button.

The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting
You can input the following marks on the chart.
●EVENT mark: During voyage, you can put an event mark at the ship position.
●Information mark: You can put an information mark at any position.
●Tidal stream mark: You can put an tidal mark at any position. The speed (knot) and bearing can be
input.
●Highlighting: You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.
Information mark
Highlighing
Own ship
EVENT mark
Knot Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT)

(1) Event marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an EVENT mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
Left-click the [EVENT] button.
- To check the information on the EVENT mark, see 3.13 “Reading Out Information on the
Objects”.
(2) Event marking using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel opens.

2) In the “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
• Enter comment on the event.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the EVENT mark.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the EVENT mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the EVENT mark
EVENT mark
(3) How to delete the EVENT mark

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
The “Delete Event Mark” panel opens.
2) Left-click the EVENT No. you want and then left-click the [Delete] button.
The panel closes and the selected EVENT mark is deleted from the chart.

3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark
You can put an information mark ( ) at any point on the chart.

The “Location/Attributes - Information” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Information” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter the comment on the information mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the information
mark.
• To edit the information mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the information mark ( ) is put on the screen.
Information mark
Position of the information
• For viewing the information on the information mark or editing/deleting the information mark,
see 3.13 “Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark
You can put a tidal stream mark at any point on the chart. The tidal stream mark has the bearing and
stream speed in knot. You can edit them after putting the tidal stream mark on the chart.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Set/Drift setting
- Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
- Enter the bearing and speed.
• Enter comment on the tidal stream mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the tidal stream
mark.
• To edit the tidal mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the tidal stream mark is put on the screen.
Position of the tidal stream mark
Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark
• For viewing the information on the tidal stream mark or editing/deleting the tidal stream mark,
see 3.13 “Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.12.4 Highlighting
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to
make notations.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Highlight” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the
cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted. Then, click on the
coordinates of a point which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Highlight” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter comment on the highlighting.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the highlighting.
• To edit the highlighting position, left-click the [Edit] button.
You will see that the highlighting is put on the screen.
Highlighting
Top of a highlighted area
• For viewing the information on the highlighting or editing/deleting the highlighting, see 3.13
“Reading Out Information on the Objects”.
Note:
• When entering data that requires detailed editing, use the user chart (See chapter 5 “Chart
Editing”).

3.12.5 Inputting Clearing Lines
Clearing lines can be displayed by using EBL/VRM.
1) When EBL/VRM is operating (see 3.17 “Operating EBL/VRM”), the start point and end point of
clearing lines should be determined from the base point and intersecting points of EBL/VRM,
and then the right button on the track ball should be clicked.
2) Place the cursor over [Create Clearing Line] in the shortcut menu to display “Not Less Than”
and “Not More Than”, and left-click on either of them.
3) Clearing lines from the center of ERL/VRM to their intersecting points will be drawn.
NLT: Not Less Than

“NLT116” means “Not less than 116°”.
NMT: Not More Than
“NMT152” means “Not more than 152°”.
• For viewing the information on clearing lines or editing/deleting clearing lines, see 3.13
“Reading Out Information on the Objects”.

3.13 Reading Out Information on the Objects
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river).
For example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout.
If the object is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart
(S-57/C-MAP/ARCS). Also, you can read out the information on the marks such as the EVENT mark
you entered.
(1) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the operation panel ([INFO])
Press the [INFO] key.
The cross cursor will change to the box cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball to point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click.
The “Information” panel opens displaying information about the selected object.
[Example display]
(2) Reading out the object on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart using the menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the “Information” panel opens according to the selected object.
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]

Displaying additional chart information:
When an object has additional information, the name of the additional information will be displayed in
the combo box under the “Information” panel.
1) Select the information name to be displayed, then left-click the [Show] button.
2) The additional information will be displayed.
• To close the additional information, left-click the [Close] button.

(3) Reading out the event/tidal stream/highlight mark/user data information and clearing
line
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Other Information] from the shortcut menu.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the “Information” panel opens according to the selected object.
• To edit the object, left-click the [Edit] button.

The “Location/Attributes” panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
• To delete the object, left-click the [Delete] button.
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example for the EVENT mark:]

3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View)
This equipment has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two
sections in which the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in
various ways. (Note that the multi view function is not available for ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3.) Also, with
the wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the display panel area.
Active screen
Own ship's symbol
View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example
View 2 screen View 1 screen
View 2
View 2 screen）
Inactive screen Wide view screen
[Multi View and Wide View]
3.14.1 Multi View Screen

You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The active screen (selected screen)
has a blue title bar as shown in the above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To set the View 1 screen active, for example, left-click the View 1 screen. At this time, off-center will be
used to place the cursor in the center of the screen for that view. If off-center is not desired, move the
cursor to the title bar of the view, then left-click.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.
2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
- Single View
- Top Bottom
- Right Left
- Right Top View
- Left Top View
- Right Bottom View
- Left Bottom View

(Single view) (Top Bottom view) (Right Left view) (Right Top view)
View 2
View 1
View 2 View 1
View 2 View 1
(Left Top view) (Right Bottom view) (Left Bottom view)
View 2
View 1 View 1
View 1
View 2 View 2
To return to the single view:

Left-click [(1) Single View]. Then, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).
Note:
• In View 2, the radar overlay, route, ARPA/AIS target ship symbols, own ship’s track, user chart
objects and manual updates are not displayed.
3.14.2 Selecting an Area

A selected area will be displayed as the Right Top view.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order.
The cursor becomes the lens cursor.
2) If previous view mode was single view, the area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed
as the Right Top view. If previous view mode was multi view, selected area in view1 is displayed
in view2.

3.14.3 Wide View Screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen
section move to the upper part of the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If the same chart is displayed in multi view, the view 1 chart area will be surrounded by a blue
line and the view 2 chart area will be surrounded with a red line.
[Close] button
Wide view
Area currently displayed (Blue line)
To close the wide view screen:

Left-click on the [Close] button on the left top corner of the screen.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original
place.

3.15 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter on the display panel. You can see the course,
heading, course to steer, set, etc. on the analog meter. Also, you can select the items to be displayed
on the analog meter.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.
The following analog meter is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COURSE) are represented by the
indicators of the analog meter. The color of the item and that of the indicator match each other.
So, you can easily identify each indicator from the color.
The white mark corresponds to the white pointer.

(Color matches each other in all items.)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessel’s motion over the
ground and the course of the route selected.)
Ship’s heading
Log speed (speed through water)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.
Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and

HDG vectors
SET (Light blue arrow)

HEADING (Gray arrow)
COURSE (White arrow)
CTS (Red triangle)
[Close] button
To close the analog meter:

Turns ON/OFF the arrow
Left-click the [Close] button on the analog meter. marks on the panel.
Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter:

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display
Panel] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart
Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display
Panel] in that order.
Then, the “Analog Display Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and
left-click the [OK] button.

3.16 Own Ship’s Setting ([Ship] - [Option])
The following settings on own ship are explained here.
●Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
●Vector display and heading line at the primary position
●Danger detection vector and sector
●Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.
COG vector
Sector (up to 360 degrees)
Heading line
Own ship (Primary position)
Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.
HDG vector
Danger detection vector

Tracking dots Tracking spot
Own ship (Secondary position) Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Own Ship’s Setting Items]

3.16.1 Ship’s Shape
You can select your ship’s shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation.
Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.
Width of ship according to scale
Length of ship according to scale
(a) (b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) In the “Ship’s Shape” panel, left-click either “Symbol” (a) or “Out Line” (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

3.16.2 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position
The COG vector (vector of the vessel’s motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessel’s
motion through the water) and heading line can be displayed for your ship’s symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ship’s current speed in
minutes. For example, if the vector length is set as 10 minutes, a vector with 1-minute notches (non-tilled),
and 6-minute notches (tilled) is displayed.
The tip of the vector is the expected position in 10 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current
speed.
COG vector
Expected position after
10 min., for example
Vector length
Heading line
HDG vector
Vector time mark

[Vector Display and Heading line]

2) Set each item on the “Vector” panel.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the “Display Head Line” on the “Track/Head Line”
panel. Then, left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel. Then, the panel will
close.
Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.
Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.
COG/HDG vector time until the ship

reaches the expected position. (Max. 60
min.)
Vector Time Mark ON/OFF
Heading line ON/OFF

3.16.3 Danger Detection Vector and Sector
You can set the danger detection vector and sector for your safety. The danger detection vector can be
set the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the sector
can be set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is shown in the
rectangular shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails at the current
speed. The sector and its radius can be set as required.
COG vector Sector Sector radius in nm
Danger detection vector
Angle
HDG vector
Danger detection vector in minute

[Danger Detection Vector and Sector]
2) Left-click each item on the “Alarm Detection” panel and then click the [Set Alarm Limit] button.
The “Alarm List Option” panel opens.
Sector display ON/OFF
Danger detection vector display ON/OFF
3) Left-click the “Vector” and “Sector” and enter the value

• Vector: Danger detection vector in minute
• Sector: Sector radius in “nm” and the angle (up to 360 degrees)
4) Left-click the [OK] button on the “Alarm List Option” panel, and then the [OK] button on the “Own
Ship Option” panel to close all panels.

3.16.4 Track and Time Label Display
The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of
information is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
Own ship (Primary position) Time labels

Every 10 to 60 min.
Tracking dots Tracking spot

Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

2) In the "Track/Head Line" panel, left-click “Display Tracking” and “Display Time Label” to select
them.
3) Select one of seven colors you want from the drop-down list. Also enter values while reading
the complete sentence written on the panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.
Color of ship’s track (Red, Green, Blue,

Magenta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, or 24 hour
0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 sec.
10, 20, or 30 sec., or 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 min.
10, 30, 60 min.

3.16.5 Beam Bearing Line
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
Beam bearing line

Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
Beam bearing line/OFF Beam bearing line/ON
3) Left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.

3.17 Operating EBL/VRM
There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the chart.
●Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
●Using the menu or the shortcut menu (1 step or 2 step operation selectable)
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel

On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You can
also set your ship’s position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.
(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker

If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dashed
line. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Distance of VRM1
Information for EBL1/VRM1
Bearing of EBL1
EBL1
Your ship
VRM
Position of crossing point of EBL1/VRM1
Position information for cursor
To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:

Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.
(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker

If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point,
and the EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dash
dotted line to distinguish them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers are controlled by turning
the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker or VRM2 marker:

Press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.
(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations

The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2
markers are simultaneously displayed.
For example, let’s assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be
operated by the EBL dial. In this case, press the [EBL1] key so that the EBL1 can be operated by
the EBL dial.

It is possible to operate EBL1. EBL2 appears and it is possible to
operate EBL2.
It is possible to operate EBL1.
[Switching of EBL1/VRM1 Marker and EBL2/VRM2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]
These can be moved independently, such as EBL1 and

VRM2 or EBL2 and VRM1.
The intersecting point positions in these cases will be
displayed by combinations of the previously displayed
EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2.
When EBL and VRM are displayed independently, only their
bearing and distance will be displayed.
Notes:
• For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
• They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating in free mode. (See the next page.)

(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point
The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ship’s position
to another position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) With the EBL1 base point displayed in the own ship position, hold down the [EBL1] key for more
than two seconds. Then, the EBL/VRM cursor appears.
2) Move the EBL/VRM cursor to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position.
(Press [EBL 1] key for more than two seconds, base point of EBL/VRM can change again.)
Hold down for more than 2 sec.
Move the EBL cursor to

a destination point.
The EBL cursor appears.
Left-click
The EBL cursor disappears

and EBL1 is fixed.
[Moving the Base Point -- Floating EBL/VRM]

The following operation should be carried out to set the base point of floating EBL/VRM at the ship’s
center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not fixed and floating. Hold down the
[EBL1] key for more than 2 seconds.
The base point moves to where the ship is.
Hold down for more than

2 seconds.
(Floating EBL/VRM) (Ship-centered EBL/VRM)
The EBL cursor appears. The base point is reset at the ship's position.
[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship's Position]

3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu
You can draw EBL and VRM on the chart either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and,
after fixing EBL, VRM appears. Also, you can draw ship-centered EBL/VRM or floating EBL/VRM.
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The “EBL/VRM” panel opens.
2) Left-click either “1 Step” or “2 Step” and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
• 1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
• 2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation

(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
1) Select “1 Step” option in 3.17.2.1 as mentioned above.
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu. The EBL1 and VRM1 are displayed on the chart.。

Intersection
Your ship
Bearing of EBL1
Position of crossing
“1”: EBL1/VRM1
point of EBL1/VRM1
Distance of VRM1
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and VRM1 and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
• The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.
To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] from the
shortcut menu.
Tips: Useful shortcut -- Abort

During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following
procedure.
Right-click at any position on the

Left-click “Abort” to abort
chart to open the shortcut menu. Rotate the trackball to move
the current operation step.
“Abort” shortcut menu will open. the cursor on the “Abort”.

(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) floating operation (1-step operation)
1) Select “1 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) • In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2)
Floating] in that order.
• In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] -
[(3) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut
menu.
The EBL1 and VRM1 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the center point at the position you want and left-click there.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.

• In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1
(Dashed-Line)] in that order.
• In the Table Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, User Chart Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(3)
Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.
shortcut menu.
Center point Intersection

(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in
that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered]
from the shortcut menu.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.
• The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
• The bearing, distance and position are displayed in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except
for “2”.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in
that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove EBL/VRM] - [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)]

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (1-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the
shortcut menu.

In the normal menu
that order.
that order.

3.17.2.3 2-step Operation
(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (2-step operation)
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Ship-Centered] from the
shortcut menu.
The EBL appears on the chart.
Your ship
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want.
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want.
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
After fixing, the cursor appears.
EBL1 (fixed)
EBL1 (fixed)
Intersection
Your ship VRM1 (fixed)

VRM1

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.

(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [Floating] from the shortcut
menu.
The EBL/VRM cursor and EBL1 appear on the chart. (Fig. (a))
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
(Fig. (a))
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want. (Fig. (b))
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
5) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want. (Fig. (c))
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
(a) (b)
Your ship EBL1
EBL/VRM cursor
(c) (d)
VRM1
Intersection EBL1 (fixed)
After fixing, the cursor appears.

In the normal menu
order.
order.
shortcut menu.

(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-centered operation (2-step operation)
that order.
that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Ship-Centered]
• The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
• The bearing, distance and position are shown in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for
“2” at the left upper corner.
For EBL2/VRM2

In the normal menu
that order.
that order.

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)
order.
order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [EBL2/VRM2 (Dashed-Dotted-Line)] - [Floating] from the
shortcut menu.

In the normal menu
that order.
that order.

3.18 Running Fix
In the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM.
This connection is kept regardless of the ship’s movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own
ship against the fixed position at all times.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.
The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.
Fixed position
Your ship
*This window disappears after left-clicking.
Bearing
“R”: Running Fix
Position
Distance
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
• The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves, the
bearing and distance displayed change accordingly.
[Relation between your ship’s position and fixed position when the ship moves]
Fixed position
Your ship
The bearing and distance are displayed here.

To delete the running fix:
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.
Or right-click on the chart, then select [Remove Running Fix] from the shortcut menu.

3.19 Maneuver Curve
Maneuver curve display function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain
conditions. By displaying a maneuver curve that has been drawn safely, the maneuver curve can be
used as a target when turning.
Supplemental line
Heading line
Planned route
R
REACH Maneuver curve
WOL (Maneuver Starting Point)
WOL line
Own ship's position
WOL: Steering point

REACH: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(6) Maneuver Curve] in that order.
The “Maneuver Curve” panel opens.
2) Set or select each item.

Reach： Enter the REACH (m).
Turn Mode： Left-click either “Radius” or “Rate”.
• Radius: Enter the constant turn diameter (nm)
• Rate: Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)

3) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting point of the
supplemental line.
If the WOL is behind own ship’s position, the line color of the WOL will change in red. In this
case, you should change the starting point of the supplemental line.
4) While holding down the [SET CO.] key on the operation panel, set the bearing of the
supplemental line with the joystick.
Moving the joystick to the left and right will change the bearing of the supplemental line, and
moving the joystick back and forth will change the radius of the turn mode.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The
position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.
When the WOL is behind the ship, the WOL line becomes red. When this occurs, correct the
bearing or the position of the supplemental line.
5) Left-click the left button.

The setting will be established.
Note:
• Be sure to input the value correctly. If the heading of the maneuver curve is the same as
that of your own ship, the maneuver curve will not be created.
To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(7) Remove Maneuver Curve] in that order.

3.20 Cross Bearing
This function displays cross bearings. An angle for calculating the own ship’s position from the
reference point can be obtained. If a position fixing sensor such as a GPS navigation system has
encountered an error causing the own ship’s position to be obscure, the own ship’s position can be
obtained by drawing a visually observed fixed target’s bearing on the chart using the cross bearing
function.

Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(3) Cursor] - [(8) Cross Bearing] in that order.
The [Cross Bearing] dialog box opens.
Reference coordinates of the cross bearing line
Reciprocal bearing from the reference point
Bearing from the reference point
Length of the cross bearing line
Selection of bearing display on the chart

(bearing/reciprocal bearing)
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the reference coordinates of the cross bearing line,
and left-click. Alternatively, enter the reference position values in the Latitude and Longitude
fields in the [Cross Bearing] dialog box.
3) Determine the angle of the cross bearing line by turning the EBL dial or entering the reciprocal
bearing viewed from the reference point.
4) Determine the length of the cross bearing line by turning the VRM dial or entering the distance.
5) The drawing of the cross bearing line is determine by left-clicking the [Set] button, and the
bearing is displayed beside the cross bearing line.

6) The cross bearing display is switched by left-clicking the [TRUE] radio button or the [REVERSE]
radio button.
[TRUE] display
[REVERSE] display
7) To display more than one bearing line, repeat steps 1) to 4). Up to ten bearing lines can be
displayed at the same time.
8) To clear all the displayed cross bearings, left-clicking [Clear].
9) To close the dialog box, left-click the [Close] button.

3.21 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode
You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart using
the display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable modes differs depending on the chart
type, either S-57/C-MAP or ARCS.
S-57/C-MAP Ed.2 Chart:

[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth
North Up Course Up Rotation
Motion
True Yes No Yes
Relative Yes Yes Yes
For Rotation mode Free Yes No Yes
Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down
list button list button
C-MAP Ed.3 Chart:

Motion drop-down Azimuth drop-down
list button list button
ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button
Explanation of each mode:

For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot
use the combination of True/Free mode and Course Up mode. Also, on the ARCS chart, you cannot
select Azimuth mode.
Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):

True： Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display.
When own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that own
ship always remains on the screen.
Relative： Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move
relatively.
Free： You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ship’s direction of travel.
Also, as the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.
Note:
• While in Relative mode, Chart Portfolio cannot be started.

[True Mode] [Relative Mode] [Free Mode]
Fixed Heading line Heading line Fixed Own ship
Heading
line
Fixed
Own ship
Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Only):

North Up： The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not flicker
and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily be read
out.
Course Up： The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
Rotation： You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.
This function is used to point the route heading up, etc.
[North Up Mode] [Course Up Mode] [Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees
Heading line Heading line Heading line
Own ship Own ship

Own ship
Mode change caused by the operation:

In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically change from the current mode to
another one.
• From True mode to Free mode:
- When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
- When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means
of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
• From Relative mode to Free mode:
- When the chart is scrolled.
- When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
• From Free mode to True mode:
- When the [HOME] button is left-clicked.
The rotation made in Free mode is retained if the mode is changed over to True.
Note:
• Course Up/Rotation is valid only the chart scale is not lower than 1/5,000,000.

3.21.1 Selecting Motion Mode
You can select Motion mode using the display panel or from the menu.
Note:
• While Chart Portfolio is running, Motion mode [Relative] cannot be selected.
(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel

Left-click the Motion drop-down list button.
Motion drop-down
list button
2) Select one of items (True, Relative, or Free) by left-clicking it.

• For C-MAP Ed.3, Motion mode [Relative] is not available.
(2) Selecting Motion mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that
order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that
order.

3.21.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel or from the menu.
(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel

1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list button on the display panel.
Azimuth drop-down
list button
For Rotation mode
2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, or Rotation) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
• If you select “Rotation”, enter its rotational angle in degrees. (0 - 359 degrees).
• If “True” or “Free” is selected in Motion mode, “Course Up” cannot be selected.
• For C-MAP Ed.3, Azimuth mode [Course Up] is not available.
(2) Selecting Azimuth mode from the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation]
in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation]
in that order.
The selected Azimuth mode will be carried out.
3.21.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode

Regardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other
charts will be loaded.
Note:
• For C-MAP Ed.3, Chart Fix mode is not available.
(1) Setting Fix mode using the display panel.

Left-click on the [Fix] button. left-click
Gray Red
The button turns red, and the chart display becomes fixed.
2) Left-click on the [Fix] button again to cancel Fix mode.
The button turns gray again.
(2) Setting Fix mode using the menu

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.

Example use of Chart Fix mode:
• If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned off, the wide area chart
(JP24NC9G) will be loaded to replace the chart automatically.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP24NC9G
• If the chart (JP440JBE) is zoomed out while Chart Fix mode is turned on, it is fixed in the display, and
no other chart will be loaded to replace it.
1:30,000 1:250,000
JP44OJBE JP44OJBE

3.22 My Port List
3.22.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access
to that position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:
• Select a chart and scale. Register the position to the My

• Shift the position you want approximately Port List using the menu.
at the center of the chart.
1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.

S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.6 “Shifting the Chart”) and
zoom in/out the chart (see 3.7 “Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)”) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So,
center the position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
• Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] or - [(2) Select Chart
from all] in that order. For details, see 3.8.3 “Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)” or
3.8.4 “Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)”.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
The “Add to my Port List” panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
• Up to 15 characters can be input.
To display the chart registered as My Port List:

Left-click the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.6.4 “Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST]
Button”.

3.22.2 Deleting My Port List
You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:

The “Marked Position” panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

3.23 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The recorded items and the
items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook option. How to display the logbook and
how to select the items to be saved are explained here.
3.23.1 Displaying the Logbook

The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.23.2 “Setting
Logbook Options”.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The “Logbook” panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No., Date, Time,

Event (kind of alarm, EVENT, Navtex, etc. -- depends on the “Logbook Option” settings.),
POS1, POS2, Latitude, Longitude, COG, SOG, Heading, Log,
Av. Speed 4h, Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours),
Voyage Dist. (G ), Voyage Dist. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water)),
Chart, Set, Drift, Wind Dir. (direction), Wind Speed, Wave Dir. (direction), Wave Height,
Air Press (pressure), Temp., Water Temp., Engine Rev. (revolution), Comments
Note:
• The voyage distance can be reset to 0.0nm. (See 3.27.5 “Clear Voyage Distance”.)
• The voyage distance is available only if the interface with the ship speed sensor is in a log pulse
format.
• Some of the items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and system
configuration used.

Button Operation (left-click the button):
[Close]: Closes the panel.
[Jump]: Left-click the record data, and then left-click this button. Then, the position of
recorded data is displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]: The “Print” panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the
printing conditions.
(This is only valid when a printer is connected.)
• Selected Message: The selected recorded data is printed.
• From/To: The data in the date range entered in the input box is printed.
[Input]: You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the
[OK] button is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the “Logbook” panel.
(The No. in this panel corresponds to the No. in the “Logbook” panel.)
[Filter]: The “Logbook Option” panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For logbook
option settings, see the next 3.23.2 “Setting Logbook Options”.
[Export]: Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be opened with a
spreadsheet program and edited with a personal computer. Select one of the
following items in the “Export” panel:
• Selected Message: The selected record data will be exported.
• From/To: Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.

The “Save As” panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] button in
the “Export” panel. Input the name of the file in the [File name] box, select
the folder in which the file is to be saved, then left-click the [OK] button.
• For the data format of the logbook to be exported, see 14.4 “Data Formats
of Files that ECDIS can Import/Export.”
[Delete Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including “Navtex” in the Event column, and then
left-click this button to open the “Delete” panel.
Select either of the following to delete desired log number that includes
“Navtex”.
• Selected Message: When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the selected log No.
in the “Logbook” panel is deleted.
• Before: Enter the date/time you want delete the Navtex
messages before the entered date/time.
When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the Navtex
messages before the set date/time are deleted.
[View Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including “Navtex” in the Event column, and then
left-click this button to open the “Letter” panel that shows the detailed
information on the Navtex messages.
You can mark it if you select Marking on the Chart. You can set expiration
date then. When Expire Date is off, a marking is deleted after the reception 15
days later.

3.23.2 Setting Logbook Options
You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger
conditions to save the log data which will only be used to display in the “Logbook” panel explained in
3.23.1 “Displaying the Logbook”.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Options] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
The “Logbook Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the “Logging” and “View” panels, and left-click
the [OK] button.
Note:
• Some of the option items of Logbook may not be available depending on the hardware and
system configuration used.
Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the “Logging” panel. Also, log
data will be saved for displaying in the “Logbook” panel,
For example, if you left-click and select “At Noon”. The log data is saved at noon.
Contents of the logbook options are as follows:
• At Noon:
Data will be saved at
12:00 (LTM).
• Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after
set duration of time.
• Route Alarm:
Data will be saved when
an alarm related to ARR,
OffCo, XTE or Route.
• Chart Alarm:
Data will be saved when
an alarm related to Chart,
SfCnt, AREA, DNG or
ARCS.
• When press X:
Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
• Autosail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to AUTO, CALL, A/P, POS1, POS2, JUMP,
DIFF, GYRO, LOG, LowSp, Radar or ARPA.
• Navtex:
Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
• Others:
Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (Setup, HARD or Timer) occurs.
• [Navtex Option]:
The “Filtering for display” panel opens. (See the next page.)

Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the “Station”,
“Month/Year” and “Message” panels. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected “Station” will be filtered by the condition set
by the “Month/Year” and “Message”, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for
displaying on the chart.
The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to the
Navtex information.
• Station: You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name.
For example, if you select the letter “A”, the station name that begins with “A”
will be accepted. If you do not select “Filtering”, Messages of all the stations
will be not accepted.
• Month/Year: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
• Message: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message. If
you do not select “Filtering”, the navigational warnings will be not accepted.
Notes:
• The above Navtex filtering function is provided for message display in Logbook.
The function is not for receiving or recording Navtex messages.
The Navtex messages to be received vary depending on the filter setting of the Navtex receiver.
For details, see the Navtex receiver instruction manual

3.24 Setting the Chart Options
You can set the various chart options.
3.24.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
The “Chart Option” panel opens. This panel consists of three panels “View Common”, “View1”
and “View2”, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab.
[“View Common” panel]
Notes:
• You can select CMAP Version setting when the [View Common] panel is selected from the normal
menu but you cannot select a chart when the [View Common] panel is selected from the Table
Editing menu, Graphic Editing menu, or User Chart Editing menu.

(1) Setting the “View Common” panel
The settings made here apply to “View1” and “View2” panels for single/multi-view.
1) Select a setting item and enter a value in the value entry box. Left-click the [OK] button on the
panel to close it.
a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [BASE], [STANDARD] and [OTHER] buttons on the
display panel are used. For detailed function, see 3.5 “Changing the Object Category
(S-57/C-MAP Only)”.
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Plane : Plane boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the dotted lines)
Boundary of the area
• Symbolized : Symbolized boundary (The boundary of the area is drawn by the symbolized
line)
Boundary of the area

c) Redraw
• Border range: Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective
only when motion “True” is selected.) Border range can set from 30%
to 80%.
• Margin (Course up): This function is effective only when the Cource up mode is selected.
(See 3.21.2 “Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)”.) The
chart will be turned step-by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if the
“Margin” is set to 10 degrees, the chart will be rotated each time the
ship turns more than 10 degrees.
[Border range setting]

• When your ship is proceeding in the direction of the arrow in the figure
• When set border range is 50%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:
• When set border range is 70%

When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:

d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Paper Chart: Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper charts.
• Simplified: A color-coded symbol is displayed.
• Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the Full Light Line
is set to ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart scale.
When the chart is enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
• Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the
minimum scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.
The minimum scale of a symbol differs among symbols. Also,
note that this item will not work when the chart (symbol) contains
no information.
[When “Paper Chart” is selected]
marks displayed on Electronic

Chart Display indicate that there are
rocks or other dangerous obstacles
in the water area where the vessel is
sailing.
Display of marks depends on
the settings of Depth Alarm. For the
method of setting Depth Alarm, see
e) “Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)”
in 3.24.1 “Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
Options”.
[When “Simplified” is selected]

[Full Light Line setting]
• When “Full Light Line” is OFF
Range of lighthouse light
• When “Full Light Line” is ON
Range of lighthouse light

The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

[Consider Scale Minimum setting]
When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is on
• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is off

e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Shallow Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
• Safety Contour: Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed
enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line
than you set is displayed.
• Safety Depth: Spot soundings smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
• Deep Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be
changed.
• Two Colour Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into
four colors. However, when “Two Colour Depth” is selected, the sea
depths are displayed in two colors, with Shallow Contour and Safety
Contour displayed as one color, and “Safety Depth” and “Deep Contour”
displayed as another color. This feature is used to clearly indicate and
divide the sea into safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be
taken during the voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
• Shallow Pattern: The “Shallow Pattern” check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at
Shallow Contour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This
function is for highlighting areas that require special care during the
voyage.
[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]

Shallow Contour
Deep Contour
Land very shallow water
medium-shallow water
medium-deep water
deep water
Safety Contour

[Two Colour Depth setting]
• When “Two Colour Depth” is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)
Land
Shallow Contour
Safety Contour
Safety Depth
Deep Contour
• When “Two Colour Depth” is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

[Shallow Pattern setting]
• When “Shallow Pattern” is ON (Shallow pattern is displayed.)
Shallow Pattern
• When “Shallow Pattern” is OFF (Shallow pattern disappears.)
f) C-MAP Ed.3 Database

ENC or World of C-MAP Ed.3 can be selected for display.
(This feature is available only when C-MAP Ed.3 has been installed.)

(2) Setting the “View1” panel
The “View1” panel setting is used for the View 1 screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single
view screen (normal screen), or the View 1 screen when you select multi view function to display
View 1 and View 2 screens. (For multi view function, see 3.14 “Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View)”.)
1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.

Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
[“View1” panel]
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for
the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 “Multi View Screen”)
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

a) Type (Type of chart)
• S-57: S-57 chart is displayed. “C-MAP Ed.2” can be selected for simultaneous
display.
• C-MAP Ed.2: C-MAP Ed.2 chart is displayed. “S-57” can be selected for simultaneous
display.
• C-MAP Ed.3: C-MAP Ed.3 chart is displayed.
• ARCS: ARCS chart is displayed.
Notes:
• ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the ARCS
PIN is correctly inputted when the Navigation & Planning is started.
• ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.
b) Text Size (S-57/C-MAP only)
Expands characters. (Limited to the standard size)
Reduces characters.
The character size in the text to which the mark is attached can be changed.
Example: Land reagion
Standard
Reduced Expanded
Reduced Expanded Expanded Reduced
Reduced Expanded Expanded Reduced
Expanded
Reduced

c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)
Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.
[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [BASE], [STANDARD], or
[OTHER] mode.
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [STANDARD] or [OTHER] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [OTHER] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.5 “Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP only).”
Display of each layer listed below can be turned on/off:
Layers in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2
[S] objects:
• Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
• Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
• Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
• Swept area
• Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
• Navigation line
• Recommended track
• Ferry route
• Radar range, Radar line
• Restricted area
• Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
• Caution area, Fairway
• Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
• Anchorage area, Anchor berth
• Cable area, Pipeline area
• Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
• Daymark
• Navigational system mark
• topmarks
• light
• Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
• Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Trafic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
• Quality of data
• Nautical publication information
• Coverage, Compilation scale of data
• Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
• Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
• Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway
• Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
• Check point, Harbour facility
• Distance mark
• Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate

• Sounding
• Depth area, Depth counter
• Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
• Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
• Fishing-facility
• Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
• Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
• Continental shelf area
• Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
• Fishery zone
• Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
• Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
• Updated Objects
Layers in C-MAP Ed.3
[S] objects:
• Land reagion, Sea area/named water area
• Causeway, Dam, Dyke, Gate
• Dyke, Slope topline, Airport, Bulding, single, Crane, Landmark, Built-up area
• Swept area
• Sand wave, Tunnel, Cable, Submarine
• Navigation line
• Recommended track
• Ferry route
• Radar range, Radar line
• Restricted area
• Ferry route, Military practice area, Offshore production area
• Caution area, Fairway
• Fishing ground, Marine farm/culture
• Anchorage area, Anchor berth
• Cable area, Pipeline area
• Dumping ground, Cargo transshipment area, Incineration area
• Daymark
• Navigational system mark
• Fog signal, Retro-reflector, Radar transponder beacon, Radar reflector
• Pilot boarding place, Signal station, Trafic, Signal station, Warning
[O] objects:
• Quality of data
• Nautical publication information
• Coverage, Compilation scale of data
• Local magnetic anomary, Magnetic variation
• Sloping ground, Land elevation, Slope topline
• Vegetation, Lake, Rapids, River, Water fall, Tideway

• Building, Fortified structure, Land mark, Silo/Tank, Airport, Road, Railway
• Check point, Harbour facility
• Distance mark
• Berch, Crane, Drydock, Mooring/Warping facility, Gate
• Sounding
• Depth area, Depth counter
• Water turbulance, Tide..., Current-non-gravitational
• Seabed area, Weed/Kelp, Spring
• Fishing-facility
• Obstruction, Wreck, Underwater/Awash rock
• Cable, Submarine, Pipeline, Submarine/on lamd
• Continental shelf area
• Custom zone, Free port area, Harbour area
• Fishery zone
• Administration area, Contiguous zone, Exclusive economic zone
• Radar station, Radio station, Coastguard station, Rescure station
[-] objects:
• Updated Objects
d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)

The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts ON
and OFF.
Text in S-57/C-MAP Ed.2

• Important text (Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
• Name/Number of: buoys, beacons, so on
• Light description
• Note on chart data or nautical publication
• Nature of seabed
• Geographic names
• Value of: magnetic variation, swept depth
• Height of islet or land feature
• Berth number
• National language
Text in C-MAP Ed.3

• Important text(Vertical Clearance bridge, overhead cable, so on)
• Other text (Name of building so on)
• Light description
• Note on chart data or nautical publication
• Geographic names & Generic Text
• National language

(3) Setting the “View2” panel
The “View2” panel setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen
(the second screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen will
not be displayed if you use a single screen (normal screen). (For multi view function, see 3.14
“Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View)”.)

• The setting contents are the same as for “View 1” panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:

• Type (Type of chart) • Layer • Text • Text Size
Note:
• Use the [View 1] panel to change the chart type from S-57/C-MAP to ARCS.
Multi screen view statuses:

The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area
for the current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 “Multi View Screen”)
Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

3.24.2 Setting Other Chart Options
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The “Other Charts Option” panel opens.

3.24.3 Setting Scales
The “Scale” panel opens.
2) Left-click the scale you want to turn ON and OFF.
Memo:
The scales selected here will be displayed when you left-click the “Scale drop-down list” button on
the display panel. Also, when you select the scale from the menu, the scales selected here are
shown actively. While the scales that are not selected here will be displayed inactively.

3.25 Setting the Alarm Options
You can set the various alarm options.

The “Alarm List Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry,
enter the value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
a) Limit
• Difference between POS1 and POS2:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the POS1 and POS2 have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
• Shift of Primary Position
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour (1 second) of
the ship is larger than the distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something
influences your ship’s position in such a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the
chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.)
• Off Course (OffCo)
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more
than the preset angle.

• Early Course Change indication (ECC):
WOL arrival alarm (currently not available)
• Arrival Last WP (Route):
Displays an alarm on the screen when the time required to arrive at the final destination is
reduced to the amount you have set.
• Timer:
An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
• Vector:
Danger detection vector in minute
• Sector:
Sector radius in nm and the angle width in degree (up to 360 degrees)
*: For vector and angle width, see 3.16.3 “Danger Detection Vector and Sector”.
b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)

You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart
contacts a danger detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
• Traffic Separation Zone
• Traffic Crossing
• Traffic Roundabout
• Traffic Precautionary
• Two Way Traffic
• Deeper Water Route
• Recommended Traffic Lane
• Inshore Traffic Zone
• Fairway
• Restricted Area
• Caution Area
• Offshore Production Area
• Military Practice Area
• Seaplane Landing Area
• Submarine Transit Area
• Ice Area
• Channel
• Fishing Ground
• Fishing Prohibited
• Pipeline Area
• Cable Area
• Anchorage Area
• Anchorage Prohibited
• Spoil Ground
• Dumping Ground
• Dredge Area
• Cargo Transshipment Area
• Incineration Area
• Specially Protected Area

3.26 Monitoring Dragging Anchor
A circle can be drawn to monitor a dragging anchor at the user-specified position. When the own ship
moves and part of outline of the own ship goes out of this circle, a dragging anchor alarm occurs.
A dragging anchor monitoring circle can be created with the own ship as the center or with the position at
which you left-click on the chart as the center.
Occurrence of dragging anchor alarm
The dragging anchor monitoring circle

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(1) Create Monitoring Circle]
in that order.
The “Monitoring Dragging Anchor” panel opens.
The central position of the current monitoring circle is displayed on the screen. By default, the
heading forward position is displayed as the center of the circle. Left-clicking on the chart can
also set the position as the center of the dragging anchor monitoring circle.
2) Enter the radius of the dragging anchor monitoring circle (10 to 999 m).
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is displayed.
• To re-set a dragging anchor monitoring circle, cancel the monitoring circle beforehand.
How to close the dragging anchor monitoring circle:

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(2) Monitoring Dragging Anchor] - [(2) Clear Monitoring Circle] in
that order.
The dragging anchor monitoring circle is cleared.

Dragging anchor alarm:
When the “Alarm list” panel opens if a dragging anchor alarm occurs, the [Anch] button blinks in
red.
[Anch] button: Dragging Anchor.

3.27 Setting the View Options ([View])
You can set various options related to View menu.
3.27.1 Setting Radar Options

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
The “Radar Option” panel opens.
2) After setting the items as required, left-click the [Close] button on the panel to close it.
Notes:
• For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
• The “Rader Option” panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.
• IR (Interference Rejection):
This function is used to remove unnecessary signals
from other radars when they are superimposed over the
selected radar signal.
• Echo Color:
This drop-down list button sets the color of the radar
echo. You can set one of four colors: green, red, yellow
and amber.
• Gain/Anti Sea Clutter/Anti Rain Clutter/Echo Brill
You can adjust these items using the dials on the
operation panel other than using the dialog box.
Select [Use Keyboard] when you use the dials on the
operation panel.
To Adjust the Radar Image Using the “Radar Option”

Panel:
1) Left-click “Use This Dialog” to turn ON it.
2) Select value with the scroll bar.
• If you left-click and turn ON “Auto”, automatic
setting will apply.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Radar
Option” panel.

3.27.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(2) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
The “ARPA/AIS” Option panel opens.
enter the value. Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Note:
• For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for ARPA/AIS to be
used.
The following items can be set:

For the ARPA and AIS target symbols that will be displayed, see the next page.
a) ARPA Target
• Display Vector: Displays the vector for the ARPA/AIS targets.
b) ARPA/AIS Target
• Display Track: Displays the track for the ARPA/AIS targets.
Note:
• Tracking spots of ARPA/AIS are cleared by changing screen, e.g. Zooming In/Out.

c) AIS Target
High Priority filter for display:
• Ring: The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
• Sector: The AIS targets within the specified bearing with the heading as the center are
displayed.
Heading line
Sector area
Guardring area
Own ship
120nm
Note:
• Maximum number of visible targets are 200. For over 200 targets, at first the targets
attributed danger have priority to show. And secondary the targets without danger are
shown the nearest from own ship one by one.
AIS Danger Status:

• CPA (Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the distance between the own
ship and the AIS target is within the set distance.
• TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the time to reach the own ship is
within the set time.
Note:
• Danger targets are able to show within the area inside the dotted line of the above figure
even if the targets are outside of Sector/Guardring area (Radius of the dotted line is
120nm). When a new danger target detect outside of Sector/Guardring area with still
showing maximum targets, the danger one is shown and the farthest target is lost.
ARPA Identitiy:
When an AIS target is displayed inside a radius of the set distance of the ARPA target, they
are regarded to represent an identical ship, and the ARPA target disappears from the
screen while the AIS target remains active.
AIS target AIS target remains active.
ARPA target ARPA target is not

shown.
Set distance
When ARPA Identity is OFF When ARPA Identity is ON

d) External/Internal ARPA
• Use Internal ARPA: Internal ARPA is not available currently.
ARPA symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Tracked target Green
Dangerous target Red (blink)
Lost target Green
Initial acquisition mark Green
AIS symbols:
Item Symbol Color
Sleeping target Green
Activated target Green
Green
Selected target depend on
other status
Dangerous target Red (blink)
Lost target Green
COG (valiable length)
ROT (fixed length)
HDG (fixed length)

HDG
[Sleeping target] [Activated target]

Conditions for AIS lost targets:
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target data is
considered to be lost. As shown in the table below, a time period for judging a target as lost
varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.
[SOLAS-compliant ship] (Class A)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the berth 18 min
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the berth 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots 60 sec
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots and it is now changing the course 60 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots and it is now changing the course 36 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 12 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course 12 sec
[SOLAS-incompliant ship] (Class B)

Time until judgment
Target status
of lost target
Vessel below 2 knots 18 min
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec
When an AIS dangerous target is lost and the target data cannot be received for 1 minute, the
target and target data are deleted.

3.27.3 Setting Analog Meter Options
How to set the analog meter options is explained in 3.15 “Using the Analog Meter”.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Display Panel] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Display Panel] in that order.
You can set the analog meter options.
3.27.4 Setting Logbook Options

How to set the logbook options is explained in 3.23.2 “Setting Logbook Options”.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Logbook] in that order.
You can set the logbook options
3.27.5 Clear Voyage Distance

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5)Voyage Distance Clear] in that order.
The “Question” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, voyage distance of logbook is cleared.

3.27.6 Setting Date/Time
When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00,
and UTC and ship’s local mean time (LMT) are the same.

Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(7) Date/Time] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Date/Time] in that order.
The “Date/Time” panel opens.
enter the value.
The following items can be set:

a) Source of UTC
Set the date/time when “MANUAL” has been selected in the date/time data source setting.
For details, see 7.5.5 “Date Data Source Setting”.
When the [Set] button is left-clicked, the [Date Time Change] panel opens.
• Enter date/month/year/ hour:minite:second numerals in the numeric input box.
b) Initial Time Zone

Set the time difference when “MANUAL” has been selected in the time zone data source
setting. For details, see 7.5.6 “Time Zone Data Source Setting”.
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time.
(E=“+”, W=“-”)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT Time zone
Note:
• When an item other than “MANUAL” has been set in the date/time data source setting,
date/time setting procedure is not necessary.

3.28 Shifting Own Ship Position
During voyage, you can shift own ship’s position on the chart using one of the following methods:
●Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor (Cursor)
●Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude (Enter Position)
●Shifts by entering the offset value (Enter Offset)
Shifted own ship
Actual own ship
When shifting the own ship position with an offset, a reference point mark can be displayed in the position
after the offset. A panel for setting the reference point will be displayed.
Please set the following items:

• Position to display the reference point:
The position can be modified by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
• Min Scale: Sets the minimum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
• Max Scale: Sets the maximum scale in which the reference point mark is displayed.
• Sensor: Selects the type of reference positioning data that is to be displayed for reference
point marks.
DR/GPS/Decca/Loran/Radar/Estimated/Visual/Astronomical/MFD/Transit
• Time: Displays the time to be displayed for reference point marks.
• Comment: Comments for a reference point mark can be input.
• OK: A reference point mark will be displayed in the specified location.
• Cancel: No reference point mark will be displayed.

Reference Point Mark
Time moved
Type of reference positioning
• For veiwing the information on reference point mark or editing/deleting reference point mark, see
3.13 “Reading Out Information on the Objects”.
Do not use the offset function during navigation.

If the equipment is used with the offset value entered as the own ship
position, the position of your ship displayed on the screen is shifted from the
real one, and accidents may result.
When the offset values are entered, the background color of the position
panel on the display panel is colored in sky blue, and the message “Position
Shift” is displayed in the message display area. Check these indications,
and cancel the offset function if necessary.

3.28.1 Shifting Using the Cursor
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The “Question” panel box opens.

The ship offset cursor appears.
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position
you want, and then left-click there.
4) The reference point setting panel is displayed.
5) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:

In the normal menu Ship offset cursor
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset]
in that order.
3.28.2 Shifting by Entering the Position

Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] button.

4) Own ship will shift to that position.
To clear the offset:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.

3.28.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The “Enter Offset” panel opens.
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] button.
4) Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.
3.29 Canceling the Ship Offset

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
The offset applied to own ship can be canceled. As the offset is canceled, the color of the position
display on the panel changes from sky blue to gray.
3.30 Printing Display

(Only when Connected to a Printer)
By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or
panels displayed on the screen.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(3) Print Display] in that order.
The “Print” panel opens.
2) Set for printing and left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.

3.31 Saving the Screen
(Only when Connected to Backup Device)
An image of the displayed screen can be saved on the hard disk as a 256-color bit map file.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
Select [MENU] - [(4) Chart] - [(4) Save Screen] in that order.
The image file of the screen will be saved with a file name in the following format:
YYYY MM DD _ HH MM SS.bmp
Year Date Minute

Month Hour Second
(Example) If the file was created at 10:50:15 on 6 June 2003, the file name would be
“20030606_105015.bmp”.
3.32 Displaying the Startup Menu

(Exit the Navigation & Planning)
After the Navigation & Planning is exited, the [Startup menu] will be displayed.
For the [Startup menu], see 3.3.2 “Selecting the Startup Menu.”

Select [MENU] and then [(0) Exit].
The “Question” panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button.
Navigation & Planning is exited, and the [Startup menu] will be displayed

4
Route
Planning
4-1
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during
voyage is explained in 4.2.
• For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.4 “Selecting ROUTE and To WP”.
• To set route options, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.
4.1 Route Planning

You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it.
Edition is possible by using either method.
●Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WP value in the WP entry table. Using the [View Sync] button,
the current WP can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
●Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WP on the chart.
Editing Screen and Editing Menu:

When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing
screen is displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it
opens by left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the same way as for normal menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly
different from those of menus.
Note:
• The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is
omitted in this Chapter.
Route Name and Extention of File:

Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
(Note) Characters such as “.” and “ ” that cannot generally be used in file names cannot
be used as route names.
Extention of File: The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as
follows.
Route-01.rtn
4 Route Planning 4-2

Route shown on the Screen:
WP0
Planned course
WP1
Planned speed [kt]
Leg
Port side (in red line)

and port side width
Starboard side (in green line) Arrival radius

and starboard side width
WP : Way Point
Note:
• For each default value, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.
4-3 4 Route Planning

4.1.1 Setting the Route Options
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(0) Option] in that order.
In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the “Route Plan Option” panel opens.
●Normal Menu
●Table Editing Menu
●Graphic Editing Menu
2) Select an item, and enter the value in the numeric input box as needed.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
a) Date/Time for monitoring
Select UTC/LMT for arrival time display during route monitoring.
UTC display LMT display

b) Select Route
When the checkbox of Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark), the arrival time is
displayed at WP during route monitoring.
When Estimated Time of Arrival is off (no checkmark):
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and UTC is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:
When Estimated Time of Arrival is on (with a checkmark) and LMT is

selected for Route Monitoring Time:

c) Default
Set the default of the route to be created during route planning.
• Width Prt: Port side width
• Width Stb: Starboard side width
• Arr Radius: Arrival radius
• Speed: Planned ship’s speed
• Sail: RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
• Turn Rate: Turn rate
• Turn Radius: Turn radius
• Time Zone: Time zone
d) Max. Latitude
Waypoints cannot be set in latitudes higher than the set latitude. If a GC leg is higher than
the set latitude, waypoints are added for limiting the GC leg to the maximum latitude.
When the GC leg between WP2 and WP3

exceeds the maximum latitude (60°N)
60°N
When the maximum latitude is 60° or more, a GC leg exceeding 60° can be input.
WP3 and WP4 are added for limiting the

GC leg to the maximum latitude (60°N).
(RL leg between WP3 and WP4)
60°N
Waypoints are added at intersections between the GC leg and 60°, so a leg exceeding 60° is
not input.
e) Check Safety in Editing

During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button or select [MENU] -
[(7) Tool] - [(1) Check Route Safety] in the editing mode menu.)
If an error is detected during the safety check, the route will have to be reset.
(The error part is drown in black color after safety check.)
Note:
• The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120° and more in longitudinal direction.

f) Route Type
Select a route type when making a route file.
Normal route TCS route
WOP
WOL

4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
●About the Table Editing mode
●Table editing menu and button functions
●Operation flowchart
●Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.

4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode

Press the [ROUTE PLAN] key.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
The Table Editing screen as shown below will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route.
[Table Editing Screen]
How to open the Table Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.

How to exit the table editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Table Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Table
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)

(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.2.4
(2) Open 4.1.2.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.2.6
(2) TCS －
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.2.6
(4) Save 4.1.2.5
(5) Save As 4.1.2.5
(6) Export 4.1.2.7
(7) Print WP Table －
(0) Exit from Route Planning －
(2) Edit (1) Insert WP 4.1.2.4
(2) Delete WP 4.1.2.4
(3) Divide Leg 4.1.2.4
(4) Set Default －
(5) Sort Reversely 4.1.2.4
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area 3.8.1
(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued）
(3) Cursor (4) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
(8) Cross Bearing 3.20
(0) Option 3.17.2.1
(5) Delete Event-Mark 3.12.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position 3.6.5
(2) Add to My Port List 3.22.1
(3) My Port List 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(2) Select Chart from all 3.8.4
(3) Change Active Panel 3.8.5
(7) Adjust Datum Offset 3.8.10
(8) Datum Transformation 3.8.10
(4) Select S-57 Chart 3.9
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart 3.10
(2) Chart Editor 5.3
(6) Manual UpDating 5.4.2
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.24.1
(2) Other Charts 3.24.2
(3) Scale 3.24.3

Table 4.1 Table Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(6) ARPA Release All －
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(7) Synchronize Chart-View 4.1.2.4
(0) Option (1) Radar 3.27.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Date/Time 3.27.6
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.3.5, 3.25
(7) Tool (1) Check Route Safety 4.1.2.4
(2) Check Limits 4.1.2.4
(3)View Ship’s Parameter －
(0) Option －

(2) Button functions
Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when inserting a new WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click to divide the GC leg.
Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking,
warning dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available)
Left-click when you want to display the WP during editing.
Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name
column contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.
Name : You can enter name in the Name column.

WP to WP : WP to WP information is displayed.
Total : WP0 to WPn information is displayed.

4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.
(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Table

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table
Editing mode.
Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.

Left-click [New].
Table editing operation

.
WP0 entry
Position (Lat./Lon.) WP0 entry screen
Left-click the next

WP No.
The following items are automatically

WP1 entry displayed. Change, if necessary.
Position (Lat./Lon.) • Width (Prt/Stb)
• Arr Rad
• Speed [kt]
Repeat WP entry • Sail (RL/GC)
until the final WP. • Time Zone
• Name
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exit the Table Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)
Start
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Table

In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table
Editing mode.
Editor] in that order.
Select a route file you want to edit.

Left-click [Open].
Select route type.
Table editing operation
Edit the WP table.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save] To save without chang- in the menu.
ing the file name.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.
End

4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) “Making a new route file (Table Editor)” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor”.
(1) Unloading the selected route before starting

Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any
route on the screen.
• You can also unload the selected route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
Then, the Table Editing screen opens. [MENU] Button
• When you open the Table Editing menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
left-click any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(1) New] in that order.

(4) Making a route
1) Left-click the “Latitude” and “Longitude” in the position column, and enter the position for WP0.
2) Left-click the next WP No. (i.e., WP1).

Then, the same position as the previous WP (i.e. WP0) is automatically set in the position
column. Also, default values are displayed in the other columns.
[Items shown in the table]

Position: Latitude/Longitude
Width Prt: Port side width
Width Stb: Starboard side width
Arr Rad: Arrival radius
Speed [kt]: Ship’s speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
Time Zone: Time zone
Name: Comment entry column.
The contents of column are changed by left-clicking
the [Name] drop-down list button and then [Name],
[WP to WP], or [Total].
Name: You can enter a comment.
WP to WP: The Name column changes as follows:
Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Distance from waypoint to
waypoint
TTG: Estimated time required from
waypoint to waypoint
Total: The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP
Dist: Total distance from waypoint 0
to the specified waypoint
ETA: Total time from waypoint 0 to
the specified waypoint

[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]
Entering GC/RL:
To enter a sailing method, you must enter a letter G (for GC) or a letter R (for RL).
Press the [R] key.
Press the [G] key.

(5) Saving the route file
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The “Save as Route File” panel opens.
2) Enter the route file name and comment. Left-click the [OK] button.
3) Left-click the [Close] button.
The “Question” dialog box will be displayed for confirming the file operation. Left-click “Y (Yes)”
to close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing
buttons are cleared from the screen.
• The route file can be edited even after it is saved.
Note:
• The route cannot be created if the GC leg extends over 120° and more in longitudinal
direction.

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:
Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
Then, the new WP will be added to the WP No. 2, and the WP2 and later WPs will
move by one line downwardly.
Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Delete WP] in that order.
Then, the WP2 is deleted and WP3 and later WPs will move by one line upwardly.
After entering WP(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(1) Check Route Safety] in that order.
The “Route Waring Check” panel opens. Left-click
“Select Leg” or “All Leg” and left click the [OK]
button. (When you use “Select Leg”, you should
select a WP to be checked beforehand.)
The Safety Check function checks not only the
displayed chart but also all-scale S-57/C-MAP
charts that cross the route to be checked.
If there are no safety issues, the following messages are displayed in the [Route
Check] result display box.
●[For “Select Leg” ]
●[For “All Leg” ]

How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:
If the following message is displayed, you should modify the route.

The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. The leg is displayed in red on the
chart.
And dangerous objected is emphasized in black color.
Shown in red
Shown in red
You can make a route while watching the WP on the chart. For example, above chart
is made with the [View Sync] button left-clicked to set it ON.
Select [MENU] - [(5) View] - [(7) Synchronize Chart-View] in that order.
Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).
(Currently not available) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Check Limits] in that order.

1) Left-click the WP with GC leg you want to divide in the WP table.

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Divide Leg] in that order.
(When you want to divide the leg between WP2 and WP3, select WP3.)
Then, the “Divide Route WP2 to WP3” panel will open.
• Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

• Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from “GC” to “RL”.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]

[Editing the Course and Distance in the “WP to WP” display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WP to WP]. You can edit the values of Cse (Course to the next WP) and Dist
(Distance to the next WP) columns.
Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the WP1 are modified. As a result,
the position of the WP2 changes according to this modification. Since the
position of the WP2 changes, the Cse and Dist values of WP2 for WP3 also
change.
WP2 (After modification)
WP3
WP1
WP2 (Before modification)
[Editing the ETA in the “Total” display mode]
In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WP from
WP0) column.
When you edit the WPn’s ETA, the ETA and ETD of WP0 to WPn-1 are
calculated based on the WPn’s ETA, and the calculated ETA values are
displayed in the table.

[Sort Reversely] In the Table Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Sort Reversely] in that order.
Then, the WPs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.
Before reverse sorting
After reverse sorting

4.1.2.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file (Table Editor)” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Table Editor”.

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode

In the normal menu
- When you open the Table Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Table Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(2) Open] in that order.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen.
Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make a new route file.

When saving without changing the file name:
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save] in that order.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

1) In the Table Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in the order.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
• If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see
(5) “Saving the route file” in 4.1.2.4 “Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with “rtn_” can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.2.7 “Exporting Route Files”).
CSV format:
For each WP of a route, a file containing a data row is created. Data are divided by a comma in this
file. You can use Microsoft EXCEL to edit this file.

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G TCS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
To convert route files into CSV format, conversion software should be procured separately.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G TCS] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import.
- About the format of route files for importing, see 14.4 “Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can
Import/Export.”
Note:
• Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as “rtn_[route name].csv.” If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as “rtn_[route name].csv (normal route).” Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,” its
name will be set to “rtn_test.csv.”
- About the format of route files for exporting, see 14.4 “Data Formats of Files that ECDIS can
Import/Export.”
Note:
• Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
●About the Graphic Editing mode
●Graphic editing menu and button functions
●Operation flowchart
●Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.

The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the
Graphic Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPs. The position (latitude/longitude)
of the cursor is shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you have entered the
WP, you can move the WP with the [Move] button or edit the WP position with the [Info] button. Also, the
route you have made can be edited with the Table Editor.
• For positioning the WPs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
The Graphic Editing screen as shown beliw will open.
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.
[Graphic Editing Screen]
How to open the Graphic Editing Menu:

Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Graphic Editing mode will open the special
menu for Graphic Editor.

How to exit the graphic editing mode:
Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0) Exit from
Route Planning] in that order.
How to print the WP table contents (only when a printer is connected):

Open the route file (WP table) to be printed, and left-click the [Print] button. Alternatively, in the Graphic
Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(7) Print WP Table] in that order.
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)

(1) Graphic editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:
Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 4.1.3.4
(2) Open 4.1.3.5
(3) Import (1) Normal 4.1.3.6
(2) TCS －
(3) 2G TCS 4.1.3.6
(4) Save 4.1.3.5
(5) Save As 4.1.3.5
(6) Export 4.1.3.7
(7) Print WP Table －
(0) Exit from Route Planning －
(2) Edit (1) Select －
(2) Add WP 4.1.3.4
(3) Insert WP 4.1.3.4
(4) Move WP 4.1.3.4
(5) Delete WP 4.1.3.4
(6) Undelete －
(7) Use EBL/VRM 4.1.3.4
(8) Use Assistant-Circle 4.1.3.4
(9) Divide Leg 4.1.3.4
(1) Sort Reversely －
(0) WP/Leg Information 4.1.3.4
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(3) Cursor (1) ARPA Release －
(0) Option 3.17.2.1
(2) Add to my Port List 3.22.1
(3) My Port List 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(2) Chart Editor －
(6) Manual UpDating －
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3

Table 4.2 Graphic Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(4) Chart (0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.24.1
(3) Scale 3.24.3
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.3.5, 3.25
(7) Tool (1) Check Route Safety －
(2) Calculate Distance to Run 3.4.3
(3)View Ship’s Parameter －
(0) Option －

Shortcut Menus
Right-clicking when editing a graphic will display a shortcut menu. One of the menus below will
be displayed, depending on the operation state when right clicking.
Same button operation:

[Insert]
Divide GC leg
Selecting a leg
Same button operation:

[Add]
[Move]
[Delete]
Selecting a waypoint
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

Entering, moving and adding a route point, and enter an object in that position.

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
Left-click when making a new route file.
Left-click to select a route file previously made.
Left-click when saving the route file currently made.
Left-click when printing the WP contents. (Only when connected to a printer)
Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting the
WP or leg.
Left-click when adding a WP to the WP0 or the to the last WP.
Left-click when inserting a WP in the course of the route.
Left-click when moving a WP.
Left-click when deleting a WP.
Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WP or leg.

4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you select a
route file previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same.
The file opening and saving operation is the same as when using the Table Editor.
(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)
Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic
Editing mode. Editor] in that order.
Open a new route file.

Left-click [New].
Graphic editing operation
WP0 entry
(using the cursor)
Next WP entry
(using the cursor)
Repeat WP entry until

the final WP.
Left-click [Save]
Enter the file name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)
Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.
Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].

displayed.
Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic
Editing mode. Editor] in that order.
Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.
Select route type.
Graphic editing operation
Edit the WP.
When you want to change the file name.
Left-click [Save as]

Left-click [Save] To save without chang- in the menu.
ing the file name.
Enter the new file
name.
Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.
End

4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)
This explanation is made according to (1) “Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)”.

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

[MENU] Button
• When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Opening a new route file

1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
In the Graphic Editing menu
How to save the route:

The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) “Saving the route file” in 4.1.2.4 “Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.

(4) Making a route
Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix
the EBL/VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM
Keys and Dials”.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display
panel.
Note:
• If [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on (with a checkmark), operation using EBL/VRM is to be performed.
If [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, operation using supplemental lines is to be performed. To
turn on/off each item, select the menu. Operation using EBL/VRM and operation using
supplemental lines cannot be turned on at the same time.
While [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is on, turning on [(8) Use Assistant Circle] turns on operation using
supplemental lines. Conversely, while [(8) Use Assistant Circle] is on, turning on [(7) Use
EBL/VRM] turns on operation using EBL/VRM.

1) Entering WPs:
Left-click at the WP (WP0) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next WP
(WP1).
Then, left-click there.
[WP0 fixing/WP0 to WP1] [WP1 fixing]
[WP1 to WP2] [WP2 fixing]

How to shift the chart during entering WPs:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart
while entering WPs.
2) Terminating WP entry:
Left-click the [Select] button to terminate WP entry. (You can also terminate the operation by
selecting [Abort] in the shortcut menu after right-clicking.)
[Left-clicking [Select] to stop entry] [The route you have entered]
Note:
• If a waypoint is located in a position other than an active chart when using ARCS and if another
panel exists at that position, then the panel display will change automatically.
Creating routes using EBL/VRM:

Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.
The EBL/VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.
Entering position
Line drawn from

the previous WP
First, left-click on the center of Then, decide where the EBL/VRM

EBL/VRM. intersection will be and left-click on it.

Creating routes using supplemental lines:
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Use Assistant Circle] in that order.
WP input using a supplemental line is enabled.
1) WP0 input
Move the cursor to an arbitrary position, and left-click. A supplemental line from the own
ship’s position will be displayed. Move the trackball to move the intersection between the
circle’s radius and supplemental line to WP0, and left-click.
Cursor Supplemental line
Supplemental line WP0 WP0
This circle is not displayed in actual operation.

2) Specify the center of the circle, and left-click.
WP0
Supplemental line
3) Move the trackball to specify the contact with the circle’s radius, and left-click. The
intersection between the circle and supplemental line will be entered as a WP.
WP1
Supplemental line
WP0

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:
Deleting the WP:

1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
[Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. Then, the selected WP is deleted.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete WP] in that order.
[Select WP3.] [WP3 is deleted.]
Adding a WP to the WP0 or to the last WP:

1) Left-click the WP0 or the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
additional WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add WP] in that order.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select WP2 (the last WP).] [WP3 is added.]

How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:
Moving a WP (other than WP0 and the last WP):

1) Left-click a WP you want to move. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for
moving the WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move WP] in that order.
[Select WP2.] [Move WP2.] [WP2 is moved.]
Tips!
Left-click the WP you want to move, and then, left-click it again. [Move] mode will be activated.

Inserting a new WP between WPs:

1) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WP there. (If you cannot select the
leg, left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to insert a new WP. Then,
left-click the cursor to fix the WP. A new WP is inserted and the number of the
later WPs is increased by 1.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert WP] in that order.
[Select the leg.] [Make a new WP.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Tips!
Left-click the leg where you want to insert a WP, and then, left-click it again. [Insert] mode will
be activated.

Designating coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:

Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding route.
Designating coordinates by entering position

1) Make sure the system will accept cursor designation of coordinates when entering, moving,
inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type on
the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

inserting and adding route. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to the cursor type
on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The “Bearing/Distance” panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
• When entering the second way point of a route, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous way point. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that do
not require relative positions, such as the first way point of route.

Displaying/Modifying information of WP or leg:

1) Left-click a WP or leg you want to know about it. (If you cannot select the WP
or leg, left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) WP/Leg Information] in that order.
When “WP” is selected, [Edit Way Point No.xx] panel opens, while [Edit leg x
to x+1] panel opens when “Leg” is selected.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WP. If
you want to return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default]
button. (The default value is set in the “Route Plan Option” panel. See 4.1.1
“Setting the Route Options”.) After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel.
[Information for WP2.]
[Information for Leg.]

[Calculate Distance to Run]

You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP
with the calculator (“Calculating Distance” panel).
1) In the Graphic Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in the order.
Then, the “Calculating Distance” panel opens.
2) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [From] panel, and select [Way
Point], [Picked Point], or [Own Ship]. If you have selected [Way Point] or
[Own Ship], select the WP number you want from the WP No. drop-down list.
If you have selected [Picked Point], specify coordinates by left-clicking an
arbitrary point on the route.
3) Left-click the drop-down list button in the [To] panel, and select [Way Point] or
[Picked Point]. If you have selected [Way Point], select the WP number you
want from the WP No. drop-down list. If you have selected [Picked Point],
specify coordinates by left-clicking an arbitrary point on the route.
4) The distance from the start point to the end point is automatically calculated,
and the calculation result is displayed in the [Distance] box. Left-click the
[Close] button.
[Select WP/Own Ship.]
[Select WP No.] [Resultant]

[Divide GC Leg]
1) Left-click the GC leg you want to divide.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Divide Leg] in that order.
Then, the “Divide Route WPn-1 to WPn” will open.
- Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.

- Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg
type is changed from “GC” to “RL”.)
[Before dividing]
[After dividing]

[Before dividing RL leg]
[After dividing]

4.1.3.5 Editing a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation
Flowchart for Graphic Editor (Graphic Editing)”.

In the normal menu
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode

- When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again,
or left-click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]
(3) Selecting the route file

1) To select the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the selected file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when
you make a new route file.

When saving without changing the file name:
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.
When saving as the new file:

2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.
4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from this equipment.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order.
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file
name starting with “rtn_” can be selected. The name of the file to be opened will be displayed in
the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import (for route
export, see 4.1.3.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

(2) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models (2G ANTS)
Import CSV format route files created with other models ECDIS (JAN-3598), Total Navigator
(JAN-1290, JAN-1397), Chart Display Unit (JAN-1100) we offer.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS] in that order
Then, use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start
file import.
Note:
• Use routes based on the world geodesic system (WGS-84).
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files

Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format.
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order.
Then, use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a route file to be exported
already has a name, save it as “rtn_[route name].csv.” If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as “rtn_[route name].csv (normal route).” Left-click on the [OK] button to save the
route file under the name displayed in the file name box.
Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,” its
name will be set to “rtn_test.csv.”
Note:
• Do not use exported routes in systems other than the world geodesic system (WGS-84).

4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation
panel. (You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)
Note:
• Before starting, be sure that [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON.
If not,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.
Be sure that the check mark is attached.
The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is
set to ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.
2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
Left-click
Line drawn from own ship

3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned WP0, and left-click there.
Left-click
4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.
(A line will be drawn through the WP0 and EBL/VRM intersection.)
(This circle is not displayed.)

Left-click

5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WP (WP1), and left-click
there.
Left-click
Green line
Red line
(Starboard side)
(Port side)
6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WP.
How to Edit the Route:

After pressing the [Add], [Move], or [Insert] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a WP
in the same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4.2 Creating an Alternate Route
During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen.
The alternate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor.
The operation buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those
for the Graphic Editor. So, the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3
“Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor”. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic
Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.
Note:
• Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
- When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route,
the original route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is
“TEMP”.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
- When you saved as a new file using the “Save as” menu, the alternate route is not replaced with
the original route. (For details, see (3) “Saving the alternate route file” in 4.2.2 “Creating
Alternate Route”.)
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start
During voyage
Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.
(Route is displayed.)
Enter Create Alternate In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that
Route mode. order.
Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.
Alternate route
making operation
: For [Info] button, see 4.1.3 “Route Planning Using the Graphic
Editor”.
The original route is replaced with the alternate route.

Left-click the [Save]
(If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
button.
replace the route, you should use “Save as” menu. In this case, the original route
remains as it is. For details, see (3) “Saving the alternate route file” in 4.2.2
“Creating Alternate Route”.)
Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.

Left-click [Close]
End

4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route
The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that,
during creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPs are altered:
• Position of WP1 (Moved)
• WP2 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.)
• WP6 (Added one WP to the last WP.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.
[Original Route]
[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]
WP6:
Added to the last WP.
Alternate Route
WP1:
Position changed.
WP2:
Inserted.

(1) Alternate Route Editing mode
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that order.
The Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below will open. (This screen is the same as for
Graphic Editor.)
[Alternate Route Editing Screen]

[MENU] Button
Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu:

On the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode
Left-clicking the [MENU] button.
The special menu for Alternate Route Editor will open. (This menu is the same as for Graphic
Editor.)
(2) Creating Alternate Route

The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens.
(When you use the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using
EBL/VRM Keys and Dials”.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
Note:
• Alternate routes will be displayed in orange so that the modified section can be differentiated from
the original route.

Moving the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click WP1 to move it. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before
starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving WP1. Then,
left-click to fix the new WP1 for the alternate route.
[Select WP1.] [Move WP1.]
[Fix the new WP1 for alternate route.]
How to shift the chart during making an

alternate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button
down, and then move the cursor to scroll
the chart while creating alternate routes.
Moved new WP (WP1).
Alternate route is created. (Orange)

Inserting the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the leg between WP1 and WP2. (If you cannot select the leg, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for inserting a new WP.
Then, left-click to fix the WP. New WP2 is inserted and the number of the later WPs is increased
by 1.
[Select the leg.] [Left-click the [Insert] button.]
[Position the new WP2.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]
Inserted WP (WP2).

Adding the WP for Alternate Route:
You can add the WP to the first WP or to the last WP.
1) Left-click the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting
operation.)
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional WP. Then,
left-click to fix the WP.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.
[Select the last WP.] [Position the new last WP.]
[WP6 is added as the last WP.]
Added WP (WP6).

Deleting the WP from Alternate Route:
1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button
before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. The selected WP will be deleted.
(In the example, WP2 is deleted. You can also delete any WP of the alternate route, such as
WP3.)
[Select WP2.] [WP2 is deleted.]
You can use this button to display and edit the selected WP and leg.
For details, see “[Info] button” (page 4-45) of (4) “Making a route” in 4.1.3.4
“Making a New Route File (Graphic Editing)”.
[Calculate Distance to Run]:

In the Alternate Route Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in that order.
You can automaticaly calculate the distance between WPs, or the distance between own ship and a
WP.
For calculation, the “Calculating Distance” panel is used.
For details, see “Calculate Distance to Run” (page 4-46) of (4) “Making a route” in 4.1.3.4 “Making a
New Route File (Graphic Editing)”.

(3) Saving the alternate route file
a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):
Note:
• In this case, the file is saved as “TEMP”, and, when you close the file, the alternate route
“TEMP” becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate
route “TEMP”.

Then, the alternate route file is save as “TEMP”.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route “TEMP”.
b) When saving as the new file ([(4) Save as] menu):
Note:
• In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the
original route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.
1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu

2) Enter the file name and comment.

4) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

5
Chart Editing
5-1
This chapter describes how to create user charts and how to manually update charts.
User Charts
User charts can be created and displayed on other charts. User chart information contains various
objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User charts can also be edited and updated. Also, you can
merge multiple charts together to create one user chart.
The following figures show how to use user charts:
Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:
User Chart 2 You can merge as

User Chart 1 User Chart 2
User Chart 1 one user chart.
Chart Chart
Chart
How to Display the User Chart:

To display the user chart, see 3.10 “Displaying a User Chart”.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in the order.
Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated. When you save data after
manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners.
Enter the date. You can check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS
information.
Unlike User Chart Edit operation, Manual Update operation links objects directly to the chart. Therefore,
the objects updated manually in the chart cannot be deleted as desired, but can only be hidden from the
chart. For the method of hiding the objects, see 5.5.3 “Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update
Operation)”.
When all the following conditions are met, objects updated manually are deleted automatically from the
chart.
• The chart having objects updated manually has been updated in Chart Portfolio.
• 3 months or more have passed since the chart was updated manually.
• The objects to be deleted are hidden from the chart.
Note:
• ARCS and C-MAP Ed.3 charts cannot be updated manually.
• The objects updated manually in S-57, S-63 or C-MAP Ed.2 chart can be used commonly in those
charts.
5 Chart Editing 5-2

5.1 Chart Edit Mode
There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow
the procedure below to start there modes.
User Chart Edit mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.
A chart edit screen as shown below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user chart.
［ [Chart Editing Screen] [MENU] Button
Manual Update mode:

In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering
screen on the left are slightly different). Use this screen to manually update a chart.
How to open the Chart Edit menu:

In User Chart Edit mode or Manual Update mode
Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel. The following Chart Edit menu will be
displayed at the top of the screen.
5-3 5 Chart Editing

5.2 Menus and Button Functions
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User
Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode.
Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree

(1) File (1) New 5.3.2.1
(2) Open 5.3.2.2
(3) Import (1) CVS file (WGS-84) 5.3.2.4
(2) CVS file (TOKYO) 5.3.2.4
(4) Save 5.3.2.2
(5) Save As 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2
(6) Merge 5.3.2.3
(0) Exit from Chart Editor －
(2) Edit (1) Select －
(2) Add Point 5.5.2
(3) Insert Point 5.5.2
(4) Move 5.5.2
(5) Delete 5.5.2
(6) Undelete 5.5.2
(7) Hide Object 5.5.3
(8) Hide All 5.5.3
(9) Reset Hide 5.5.3
(1) Use EBL/VRM 5.4.2, 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2, 5.5.2
(0) Location/Attributes 5.5.2

(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
5 Chart Editing 5-4

Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(3) Cursor (6) Maneuver Curve 3.19
(0) Option 3.17.2.1
(2) Add to my Port List 3.22.1
(3) My Port List 3.6.4, 3.22.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(2) Chart Editor －
(6) Manual UpDating －
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(3) Rotation 3.21.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.21.1
(2) Relative 3.21.1
(3) Free 3.21.1
(1) Fix View 3.21.3
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS 3.24.1
(3) Scale 3.24.3
5-5 5 Chart Editing

Table 5.1 User Chart Editing Menu Tree -- Continued
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) ARPA/AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(4) AIS 3.3.9
(5) ALL 3.3.9
(8) ALL List 3.3.9
(5) Logbook 3.23.1
(2) ARPA/AIS 3.27.2
(4) Logbook 3.23.2
(6) Alarm (1) List 3.3.5, 3.3.7
(2) History 3.3.5, 3.3.7
(0) Option 3.25
5 Chart Editing 5-6

Shortcut Menus
Shortcut menus are displayed by right-clicking when editing charts. Depending on the cursor type
when right-clicking, one of the following menus will be displayed. See 5.5 “Entering Objects” for
details on the various cursor types.
When the Cursor Type is .
Enter an object at the designated longitude and latitude.
Designate the bearing and distance from the previous way

When the Cursor Type is . point, and enter an object in that position.
Buttons for the same operations:

［Add］
［Insert］
［Move］
［Delete］
［Info］
Available when the cursor type is .
5-7 5 Chart Editing

5.2.2 Button Functions
In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons
are used in User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.
[User Chart Edit mode]
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
① Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During user chart edit:

②
Left-click on this button to create a new user chart file.
Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual
③
update).
④ Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
⑤ Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to
⑥
the area.
⑦ Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
⑧ Left-click when moving an object.
⑨ Left-click when deleting an object.
⑩ Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
[Manual Update mode]
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
① Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.
During manual update:

② Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.
Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual
③ update).
④ Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.
⑤ Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.
Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to
⑥ the area.
⑦ Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.
⑧ Left-click when moving an object.
⑨ Left-click when deleting an object.
⑩ Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.
5 Chart Editing 5-8

5.3 Operation Flowchart
This section describes how to edit user charts. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4
“Manual Update Operation.”
Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user chart file and when you open a
created file. Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of
chapter 4 “Route Planning.”
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit

(1) Creating a new user chart file
Start
Start User Chart Edit

mode.
Left-click on the
Open a new user chart file.
[New] button.
Chart edit operation
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects” .
• Areas
• Texts
Left-click on the Enter a file name and a

[Save] button. comment.
Select a datum in the

“Datum Conversion”
panel.
Left-click on the
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
[Close] button.
End
5-9 5 Chart Editing

(2) Editing a user chart file
Start
Start User Chart Edit Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.
mode.
Left-click on the Open user chart file you wish to edit.

[Open] button.
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects”.
• Areas
• Texts
When overwriting When saving under a new file name

Left-click on the
[Save] button. Select [Save as] from
the menu.

panel.
Left-click on the
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
[Close] button.
End
5 Chart Editing 5-10

5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts
File operations are different when you create a new user chart and when you edit an existing user chart.
This section describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow 5.3.1 “Flow of User Chart Edit”).
This section also describes how to merge user charts and how to import user chart files.
• Creating a new user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
• Editing a user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.2
• Merging user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.3
• Importing user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.4
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart

Follow the procedure below to create a new user chart.
(1) Entering the Chart Editing mode

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in the order.
How to exit the user chart editing mode:

Left-click the [Close] button. Alternatively, in the User Chart Editing menu, select [(1) File] - [(0)
Exit from Chart Editor] in that order.
- When you open the Chart Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Chart Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or
[Chart Editing Menu]
(2) Opening a new user chart file

1) Left-click the [New] button.
In the User Chart Editing menu
5-11 5 Chart Editing

(3) Entering objects
1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on
(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).
If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.
2) Proceed to 5.5 “Entering Objects” and enter objects.

• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.
(4) Saving a user chart file

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save], [(5) Save as] in that order.
The “Save as” panel opens.
2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.

3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.
Then, the “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.
• Select Datum:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
(5) Exiting the User Chart Editing mode

1) Click the [Close] button to exit the mode.

5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart
Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user chart.
(1) Starting User Chart mode

(2) Opening a user chart file

1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart file will be displayed.
(3) Entering objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart,
[(1) Use EBL/VRM] is turned off (remove a checkmark).


• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.

When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Chart Edit mode.
When saving a file under a different name (using the [(5) Save As] menu):
1) In the User Chart Editing menu
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
The “Save as” panel will be displayed.
2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.

3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Chart Edit mode ends.

5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts
You can merge the user charts as follows:
1) Make a new user chart file or recall a user chart file.

(For example, recall User-01 file.)
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Merge] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then
left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
If you want to save as the new file,
Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
User Chart "USER-02" You can merge as one

user chart.
User Chart "USER-01"
User Chart

5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts
User chart files can be imported and used.

Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order.
And select a file format to be used at the destination.

- CSV file (WGS-84)：
Select this when importing user chart data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
- CSV file (TOKYO)：
Select this when importing user chart data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as
WGS-84 geodetic system data.
For the data format of the user chart to be imported, see 14.4 “Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export.”
The “Open” panel will be displayed.
2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart will be displayed on the screen.

5.4 Manual Update Operation
This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user chart edit process, see 5.3
“Operation Flowchart” When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the
issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. When certain conditions, such as period that
passed since the manual update, are met (see page 5-2), the entered objects are deleted automatically
from the chart.
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start
Start Manual Update In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual UpDating]
mode. in that order.
Left-click on the
[Start] button.
Left-click on a chart
[Example]
you wish to edit.
• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects.”
• Areas
• Texts
Left-click on the
[Save] button

panel.
Enter the issue date of

a notice to mariners.
Left-click on the
Exit Manual Update mode.
[Close] button.
End

5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects
This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 “Flow of
Manual Update”).
(1) Starting Manual Update mode

- Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu.
The Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button
again or left-click anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.
[Chart Edit menu]
(2) Selecting a chart to be edited

1) Left-click on the [Start] button.
The “Information” panel will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel
closes.
2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.

A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the
panel closes (as shown below).
(3) Entering Objects

(checked). If you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(1) Use EBL/VRM] off
(remove a checkmark) by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(1) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.

1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Normally, conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum]. Normally,
conversion of geodesic systems is not necessary.
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
The “Notices to Mariners” panel opens.
Enter “the issue date of a notice to mariners.”

4) Left-click on the [Close] button.
Manual Update mode ends.

Tips! (How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
• You can use the Object “Information” panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for
entered objects.
Use the [INFO] button.
In the normal menu
The object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be displayed.
Display example

5.5 Entering Objects
This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Chart Edit and
Manual Update modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Chart
Edit mode and Manual Update mode use different symbols and lines.
●Object types available for user chart edit

[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

●Object types available for manual update
[Symbol] Tab [Line] Tab [Area] Tab [Text] Tab

5.5.1 Selecting Object Types
1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (Symbol, Line, Area, and Text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See “How to Select Objects” below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
3) Left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom part of this panel. Then, the cursor changes as follows:
: Object entry cursor
Now you can enter the object you have selected.
How to Select Objects:

You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select “Light flare, 1)
default” symbol of the Barrel buoy, perform as follows. 2)
1) Left-click “Buoys” twice quickly to open the items 3)
behind it.
2) Left-click “Barrel buoy” twice quickly to open the
items behind it. (Keep continue this operation until “-”
mark disappears.)
3) Left-click “Light flare, default”.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
• To close “Buoys”, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also select the item by left-clicking “+” and “-”
mark:
• Left-clicking “+” will open the behind items.
• Left-clicking “-” will close the behind items.
Before entering the object, always left-click this button.

5.5.2 Entering Objects
See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when enetering objects.
(1) How to enter symbols

Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the symbol selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
changes to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
First entry Second entry
Last entry
Deleting symbols [Delete]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to delete with the cursor .
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. (If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].)
Selected symbol
Moving symbols [Move]:

1) Left-click the symbol you want to move with the cursor .
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To terminate the operation, left-click the [Select] button or any position on the chart.
(When you left-click the cursor.)

Designating object coordinates by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance:
Positions can be designated by entering the position or entering the bearing/distance instead of
left-clicking on the chart to designate a coordinate when entering, moving, inserting and adding
symbols, lines, areas and text.
Designating coordinates by entering position

inserting and adding symbols, lines and areas. (Make sure that the cursor has changed to
the cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Lat/Lon] from the shortcut menu.
3) Enter the position (longitude and latitude), then left-click the [OK] button.
The psnel is closed and the position is designated.
Designating coordinates by entering bearing/distance

inserting and adding objects, lines, areas and text. (Make sure that the cursor has changed
to the cursor type on the chart.)
2) Click the right trackball button, then select [Enter Bearing/Distance] from the shortcut menu.
The “Enter Bearing/Distance” panel opens.
3) Enter the bearing and distance from the previous way point, then left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
• When entering the second point of a line or area, the bearing and distance are those from
the previous point. When moving objects, the bearing and distance are those from the
previous position. The shortcut menus cannot be used when designating coordinates that
do not require relative positions, such as symbol and text entering.

Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):
1) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
• You can edit the latitude and longitude by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
• You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to “Rotation”.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can enter a comment.
Rotated symbol by 90 degrees
Difference in symbol display between User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the
user chart edit operation will not have this mark.
[Symbols used in the user chart edit operation] [Symbols used in the manual update operation]
This mark will be

added.

Tips!
• During editing, you can see what kind of operation is currently possible from the active button.
For example, when you left-click a symbol, the following buttons will be active.
[Select], [Move], [Delete] and [Info]
This means that you can move, delete, or deselect the selected symbol. Also, you can see the
information on the selected symbol with the [Info] button.
• Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)

Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 “Hiding Objects (Only during the
Manual Update Operation).”
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:

You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or
drawing a line. When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.”
• When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(1) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

(2) How to draw lines
Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the line selection panel.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a
line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
Tips! (Moving the chart)

• Click the left trackball button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart.
Move the trackball while holding the left button down to move the chart.
Deleting the line [Delete]:

1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to delete so that the whole segments of
the line are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
Tips! (Moving the chart)

• When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In]
button provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target
segment easily.

Inserting the segment [Insert]:
1) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to insert the segment.
4) To terminate insertion, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the
cursor changes to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up
menu.)
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:

1) Left-click the last segment of the line.
2) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(2) Add Point] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) To terminate addition, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor

Moving the line [Move]:
1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to move so that the whole segments of
the line are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the line.
Getting information and editing information (Line)

1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(0) Location/Attributes] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment using the [Edit]
button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the line’s attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths)
and line style (3 styles).
- You can enter a comment.

(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon)/(Warning Area)
How to draw the Polygon and Waring Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that for
line. So, for detailed operation, refer to (2) “How to draw lines” mentioned earlier.
Drawing area (Polygon)/(Warning Area):

1) Select Polygon or Waring Area on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. (To abort,
right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.) Area is created and the cursor
changes to .
(Draw sides.) (Left-click [Select].)
Getting information and edit area (line):

1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
- You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area using the [Edit] button.
- You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
- You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
- You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
- You can enter a comment.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.
(Same color but transparency differs.)

Moving the area [Move]:
2) Left-click the [Move] button, move the cursor to the position you want to move, and left-click the
cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(4) Move] in that order.
Then, the area moves at the designated point.
(Left-click [Move].) (Left-click the cursor.)
Deleting the area [Delete]:

2) Left-click the [Delete] button.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Delete] in that order.
Then, the area is deleted.
If you want to undelete,
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete] in that order.
This will be deleted.
Adding a side to the area [Insert]:

1) Left-click the side of the area you want add a side.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, move the cursor to the position you want, and left-click the cursor.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(3) Insert Point] in that order.
Then, new side is added to the area.
(Left-click the side.) (Left-click [Insert].) (Left-click the cursor.)

(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse
1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom
of the area selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw a ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, left-click the object, and then the [Info]
button.
(Left-click the cursor.) (Left-click the cursor.)
(Color can be changed using the [Info] button.)
(Same color but trans-

parency differs.)
[“Location/Attributes” panel for Circle/Ellipse]

• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
• You can edit the radius/axis of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
• You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(5) How to draw areas -- Fans
1) Select Fans on the area selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the bottom of the area
selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor.
5) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the
cursor changes to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up
menu.)
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, left-click the fan, and then the [Info] button.
• Case 1 • Case 2
[“Location/Attributes” panel for Fan]

• You can edit the radius/axis and angle of the fan.
• You can change the attributes, line color (8 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3
styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (8 colors) and the transparency of the color
(0%, 25%, 50%, 75%).
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

(6) How to enter text (small/large font)
1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel and left-click the [Apply] button at the
bottom of the text selection panel.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
The word “Text” is displayed at the left-clicked position.
At the same time, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens. You can specify the location and
select attributes by using this panel.
(When you select Small Font) (When you select Large Font)
[“Location/Attributes” panel for text]

• You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
• You can change the color (8 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
• You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.
3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.

The settings made in the “Location/Attributes” panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.

4) Editing entered text
Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit (“Text,” for example).
Then, left-click on the [Info] button. The “Location/Attributes” panel opens. By referring to
step 2) above, edit the position and attributes of the selected text.
Left-click on the [OK] button when you finish editing. The panel closes.
The new settings will be applied to the selected text.

5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)
Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them
from the chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.。
(1) Hiding objects

And start Manual Update mode (if you are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the
mode and then restart it).
2) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.
(2) Restoring hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Hide All] in that order.
Manually updated objects are all hidden for five seconds, and then they will be displayed again.
The objects that were hidden by the method in 5.5.3-(1) are not displayed.
(3) Re-hide Restored hidden objects

2) In the User Chart Editing Menu
Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Reset Hide] in that order.
Hidden objects are all displayed collectively for five seconds, and then they will be hidden again.

6
Automatic
Sailing
6-1
Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route
and crossing safety contour.
When this system is connected to an autopilot, a set course is calculated from the scheduled route and
ship’s position. By outputting the set course to the autopilot, automatic sailing along the scheduled route
is possible.
Note:
• Automatic sailing is not permitted while charts are displayed in multi view mode.
And exiting Navigation & Planning is not permitted during automatic sailing.
6.1 Automatic Sailing System

6.1.1 Change of Course (Turning)
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, you need to perform the following operation for turning
the ship.
• On the operation panel, press the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]).
Next Leg
Boundary of WP
Arrival alarm
Cross track distance (XTD)
[Turing Operation]
6 Automatic Sailing 6-2

6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm
●Warning and Alarm
Condition of warning/ Operating status of
Warning/alarm Remarks
alarm occurrence automatic sailing
OffCo The difference between Can be continued. －
(Off Course) heading and leg bearing
has exceeded the limit.
The ship has gone be- Can be continued. －
XTE
yond the set route
(Cross Track Error)
width.
ARR The ship has arrived at Can be continued. －
(Arrival a WP) the boundary of the set
WP.
GYRO Gyrocompass has got Should be stopped. Change the steering mode of the
out of order. autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise,
the autopilot retains the rudder angle set
last. (For details, see the instruction
manual for autopilot.)
POS1 The system position 1 In case of DNV-classed
Change the steering mode of the
(Primary) has some errors. vessels holding NAUT-
autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise,
OC notation, use dead-
the autopilot retains the rudder angle set
reckoning for 10 min-
last. (For details, see the instruction
utes, and then, stop au-
manual for autopilot.)
tomatic sailing.
JUMP The system position Can be continued. －
shifts beyond the limit.
Route On the sailing final leg, Stop automatic sailing Change the steering mode of the
the time has reached after passing through autopilot to “Auto” or “Hand”. Otherwise,
1-5 minute(s) before the the final destination. the autopilot retains the rudder angle set
estimated arrival time at last. (For details, see the instruction
the destination. manual for autopilot.)
LowSp Ship speed through Can be continued. －
water has lowered to
less than the set value.
LOG Sensor for speed Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the
through water has got steering mode of the autopilot to “Auto”
out of order. or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
retains the rudder angle set last. (For
details, see the instruction manual for
autopilot.)
A/P The autopilot has got Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the
out of order. steering mode of the autopilot to “Auto”
or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
autopilot.)
CALL ARR or Route alarm Should be stopped. Stop automatic sailing. Change the
does not occur for 30 steering mode of the autopilot to “Auto”
seconds. or “Hand”. Otherwise, the autopilot
autopilot.)
6-3 6 Automatic Sailing

6.2 Setting the Automatic Sailing
Automatic sailing can be set.

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the “Autosail Option” panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required.
a) Tracking Gain
When the ship leaves the route, this setting determines how tightly the course is maintained.
There are three settings: Low, mid and high. An example of the difference between the
own ship cross track distance (XTD) and strength with which the ship returns to the route
depending on the tracking gain setting is shown below. The set heading when deviating to
the port side when the ship’s heading is 0 degrees and the route heading is also 0 degrees is
shown.
High
Mid
Low
Note:
• The graph above is only one example. The actual values will differ from those in the graph
depending on the constant of the ship and its equipment.

b) Drift Correction
When the ship’s speed is more than 5 knots, then control will take drift into consideration.
(Not currently available)
Set heading Drift
Actual route that is expected
c) Dead Band
When dead band is set, a stable course is maintained. Therefore, within the specified
range centered on the route, the set heading is the same as the route heading.
Dead band can be set within the range from 0.001nm to 0.999nm.
Next waypoint
Dead band
Previous waypoint Set heading

(parallel to the route)
d) Autosail
Displays the automatic sailing mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
Depending on the specification of the autopilot connected with the ECDIS.
(Only Normal route is currently available)
e) Turn Mode
Displays the turn mode with which the connected autopilot is compatible.
(Only Constant Radius is currently available)
Only “Tracking Gain” and “Dead Band” can be set during automatic sailing.

6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation
The following shows the outline of the operation of ECDIS and autopilot during automatic sailing.
ECDIS Autopilot
1) Select the route, and start automatic

sailing. 2) Set the mode of the autopilot to “NAVI” for
(See the descriptions below for the the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
details of this procedure.) (Set it to “RC” for the autopilot made by
TOKIMEC.)
3) Monitor the route.
4) After ending voyage, change the mode of
the autopilot from the “NAVI” to “HAND”.
5) Select “UNLOAD” for “ROUTE” to clear
the route from the screen.
If the own ship has arrived at the boundary of a WP during automatic

sailing, be sure to check the safety and perform turning manually (press the
[TURN] key while keeping the [GUARD] key pressed).
Otherwise, the ship keeps the course with the leg bearing, and accidents
may result.
During sailing, be sure to check own ship’s position and bearing as often as
necessary, regardless of whether the automatic sailing is in operation or
not.
Note:
• For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual.

6.3.1 Selecting the Route and the WP
To select the route, use the “ROUTE” on the display panel.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order.
(For details, see 3.4 “Selecting ROUTE and To WP”.)
6.3.2 Start Automatic Sailing

Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the “Select WP” panel opens.

Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to continue automatic sailing procedure.

Then, the automatic sailing starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.
During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN]) as follows:
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, ARR (arrived at WP) alarm is issued.
Press the [TURN] key on the operation panel while pressing and holding down the [GUARD] key.
Then, the ship will start to turn.

6.3.3 Terminating the Automatic Sailing
Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to stop the automatic sailing.

7
Tool Menu/
Maintenance Menu
7-1
The tool menu consists of the following submenus.
●File Manager:
The file manager performs file copying operations. For example, you can save the data such as the
route file you have created in the FD. Also, you can copy the FD’s files to the system’s hard disk.
●Chart Portfolio
Charts are imported/updated/deleted.
For chart portfolio operations, see chapter 8 “Chart Portfolio.”
●Chart abbreviations
Descriptions of chart abbreviations are displayed.
●Navigation data Graph
A navigation data graph will be displayed. See the separate operation manual for details.
●Setting the User Key
Register [USER] key functions.
The maintenance menu consists of the following submenus.

●Connectivity
Connectivity between the ECDIS and external sensors will be checked.
●Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ship’s position is entered is set up.
●Color Pattern
A test pattern to check the colors displayed for ECDIS is displayed. (Only ARCS)
●For Engineers
This submenu is to be used only by our service personnel. It is usually unavailable.
7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-2

7.1 File Manager
Route files and user chart files can be copied from the hard disk to floppy disks and vice versa. Route
files and user chart files can also be deleted.
• In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(1) File Manager] in that order.
Example of Copying: Copying a route file from the hard disk to a floppy disk.
1) Left-click the drop-down button “a”, then select “Route File” from the box. When route files are
selected, all files with the extensions “.rtn” and “.rta” are displayed.
2) Select “Local Disk” from box “b”. The route files saved on the hard disk will be displayed in box
“c”.
3) Left-click the drop-down button “d”, then select Floppy Disk from the box.
4) Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, left-click the file to be copied from box “c”, then
left-click the [Copy] button (“f”) to start copying. The selected file will be copied to the floppy
disk. When a file is selected from the box “e”, and the button “g” is clicked, then a file on the
floppy disk can be copied to the hard disk.
In order to copy a user chart, “User Chart” should be selected from the box “a”. (Files with the
extension “.uch” are displayed.)
a)
b) d)
e)
c)
f)
g)
7-3 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu

Deleting Files:
1) With files displayed in box “c”, select a file or left-click the [Select All] button to select all files.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button under box “c”. The delete confirmation panel will be displayed, so
press the [OK] button to delete the file(s). The same process can be used for box “e” to delete
files in box “e” with the [Delete] button under it.
Files that can be Handled with File Manager:

Route files: Normal route files (extension “.rtn”). (created with chapter 4 “Route Planning”.)
User charts: User chart files (extension “.uch”, created with chapter 5 “Chart Editing”).
Copying and Deleting Files on Backup Devices:

When a backup device is connected to the ECDIS through a network, “Backup” will be added to
boxes “c” and “d”. By selecting “Backup”, files can be copied and moved to the backup device, or
they can be copied from the backup device.

7.2 Chart Abbreviations
Displays a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations.

Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(3) Chart Abbreviation] in that order.
An “Information” panel with a table of the meanings of the chart abbreviations is displayed.

7.3 Setting the User Key
Register [USER] key functions.

Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(5) Set User Key] in that order.
The [Select] dialog box will be displayed.
2) Left-click in the function display box. The selectable functions will be listed. Left-click the
function that is to be assigned to the user key.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.

7.4 Connection
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.

Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(1) Connection] in that order.。
The “DEVICE DATA DUMP” panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be
displayed in the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected
external device will be displayed in the output data display box in real time. Left-click on the
[Stop] button to stop information from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear
the currently displayed information. If there is no inputting/outputting of data between the
ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will be displayed in the data display box.

7.5 Sensor
The external input sensor such as GPS, etc. in which the own ship’s position is entered is set up.
The external sensor options are as follows:
●Primary position and secondary position of own ship
●Bearing and speed
●Depth
●Date data source
●Time zone data source
Note:
• The options available for each sensor differ depending on the system configuration used.
7.5.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position

On this equipment, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g., GPS navigation, LORAN or
dead-reckoning). This is called the primary position (POS1) or system position. A secondary position
(POS2) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly checks how
far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.

Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(2) Sensors] in that order.
The “Sensor Connection” panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Position fixing system for the primary position “POS1”

(Select from “(D)GPS1”, “(D)GPS2” and “DR”.)
Select “#1”.
Position fixing system for the secondary position

“POS2” (Select from “(none)”, “(D) GPS1”,
“(D)GPS2”, “DR” and “DR-Reset”.)
Select “#1”.
Turning ON/OFF of the secondary position display
• (D)GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position.
• (D)GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the sensor to enter the own ship’s position.
• DR (normally, not used): The own ship’s position is estimated on the basis of heading, ship
speed, SDME, etc.
• none: The secondary position is not used.
• DR-Reset: To correct the errors that occur while DR is used, GPS data of POS1 is used as
the reference position of DR. The GPS data obtained when “OK” in “Sensor
Connection” panel is left-clicked after “DR-Reset” is selected will be used as the
reference position.
The secondary position symbol is displayed as “◎” regardless of the scale. The track information for
the past six minutes is displayed in green. Other information cannot be displayed. The symbol and
track can also be turned ON and OFF.

7.5.2 Bearing Setting
a) Gyro
Select this item if the gyro sensor is used for the heading sensor. Gyro sensor’s information
is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used detects the synchro/
step gyro, the initial value must be entered. After entering the value, left-click the [Set]
button to fix it.
• GYRO: NMEA out put type gyro is used for the heading sensor.
• NSK: Synchro/step gyro is used for the heading sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the bearing of the ship.
Heading (GYRO, NSK)
Select “#1”.
7.5.3 Speed Setting

a) Log
Select the log sensor. Log sensor’s information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
• NSK: Pulse log is used for the ship speed sensor.
• SONAR: NMEA out put type log is used for the ship sensor.
b) Manual (not used usually)
Enter the value when you apply any value as the speed of the ship.
The maximum speed that can be set is 100.0 kt.
Ship speed relative to water (LOG, NSK, SONAR)
Select “#1”.

7.5.4 Depth Setting
Depth (DEPTH)
Select “#1”.
• DEPTH: Echo sounder is used as the depth sensor.

• NAVI/F2: Echo sounder is used with NAV interface.
7.5.5 Date Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Date/time setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
Select “#1”.
• GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.

• GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of date/time setting.
• MANUAL: Date/time setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 “Setting Date/Time”.
7.5.6 Time Zone Data Source Setting

2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter the value to the value entry box.
Time zone setting data (GPS1, GPS2, MANUAL)
Select “#1”.
• GPS1: No.1-GPS or No.1-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
• GPS2: No.2-GPS or No.2-DGPS is used as the data source of time zone setting.
• MANUAL: Time zone setting is made manually. See 3.27.6 “Setting Date/Time”.

7.6 Color Test (ARCS Only)
The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.

Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(3) Color Test] in that order.
The color pattern for the ARCS color test will be displayed.
You can check a display state of the display unit from the color pattern.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

8
Chart
Portfolio
8-1
This chapter explains the methods of importing/updating the charts (S-57, S-63, C-MAP and ARCS). After
import/update procedure is completed, the updated charts can be displayed on the Navigation & Planning
screen to use for navigation.
To import/update the charts, the following items are required:
• S-57 : Chart CD-ROM
• S-63 : Chart CD-ROM and cell permit FD
• C-MAP Ed.2 : Chart CD-ROM and authorization code
• C-MAP Ed.3 : Chart CD-ROM, and dongle (eToken), license FD or code
• ARCS : Chart CD-ROM, and license permit FD or code
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio

(1) Entering the Chart Portfolio (Startup Menu)
1) On the operation panel, turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key.
The Startup menu will then be displayed.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the “ ” in the startup menu.
Then, the Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.
Note:
• The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for about 10
seconds.
8 Chart Portfolio 8-2

(2) Entering Chart Portfolio (Navigation & Planning menu)
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] in that order.
The Chart Portfolio screen will be displayed.
When Starting Chart Portfolio from the Navigation & Planning Menu
Both Navigation & Planning and Chart Portfolio are running concurrently. When changing the
display from Navigation & Planning to Chart Portfolio, select the following in order.
In the normal menu
Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] in that order.
To switch the display from Chart Portfolio to Navigation & Planning, select the following in order.
In the Chart Portfolio menu
Select [Tool] - [Change Navigation & Planning] in that order.
Note:
• When Chart Portfolio is started by selecting [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1)
Create] from Navigation & Planning, be sure to exit Chart Portfolio before exiting Navigation &
Planning.
• It is not possible to select Chart Portfolio when the relative motion mode is selected or the
radar image is displayed.
• If C-MAP Ed.3 chart is installed, Chart Portfolio cannot be started through Navigation &
Planning.
[Chart Portfolio Screen]

Menus Buttons [Exit] Button
Source Chat Table/System Chart Table The record of importing/updating
Note:
• CD-ROM is checked when starting Chart Portfolio.
If CD-ROM is in CD drive, starting time may take longer.
8-3 8 Chart Portfolio

(3) Exiting the Chart Portfolio
Do not turn off the power during index creation by Chart Portfolio.
Otherwise, a malfunction may occur.
1) Left-click the [Exit] button on the Chart Portfolio main screen.

Then, the following confirmation dialog box opens. Left-click the [OK] button to exit the Chart
Portfolio. If an ARCS chart has been imported/updated, an index (chart management
information) is created after the [Exit] button is pressed. If the power fails and Navigation &
Planning cannot be started, see 10.6 “Troubleshooting” in page 10-15.

8.2 Chart Portfolio Screen
The Chart Portfolio main screen (see page 8-3) consists of the following parts:
• Menus
• Buttons (All button function can be accessible from the menu)
• Chart table display area
(1) Menus
Chart:
●[ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit]:

Opens “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel for importing and registering the Chart Permit. (This is
an administration tool.)
●[ARCS] - [Regenerate Index]:
Regenerates ADCS index (chart management information).
●[C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code]:
Opens the “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel for license registration and confirmation
operation.
●[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Order/Regist/Confirm License]:
Opens the “CM93/3 Registration Wizard” panel for license registration and confirmation
operation.
●[C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts]
Opens the “C-MAP Ed.3 Chart Update” panel for chart update operation.
●[Import/Update]:
Starts importing/updating the charts read from the CD-ROM.
●[Abort]: Aborts the importing/updating processing.
●[Exit]: Exits the Chart Portfolio.

Sort:
Selectable chart types
●[Retry Auto-Detect]:
Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.
●Chart types ([S-57], [S-63 (Offline)], [C-MAP Ed.2], [C-MAP Ed.3] or [ARCS]):
The charts of the selected type will be displayed in the source/system chart table in the Chart
Portfolio main screen.
Edit:
●[Selectable Filter]:
Turns ON/OFF the filtering function.
●[Select All]:
Selects the all cells/zones in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
●[Delete]:
Delete the selected cell in the system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Note:
• In the case of ARCS, When [Delete] is selected, all of chart and permit is deleted.

View:
●[Chart Information]:
Shows the detailed cell information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart table
on the Chart Portfolio main screen. (For S-57/S-63/C-MAP Ed.2/C-MAP Ed.3)
●[ARCS License Information]:
Checks the validity of the ARCS license information and shows the check result.
●[Log]:
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process. Other log
may be displayed.
●[Last Update]:
“Last Update” instead of “Expiry” is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A date of
updating by Chart Portfolio is displayed in the “Last Update” column.
●[Expiry]:
“Expiry” instead of “Last Update” is displayed in the System Chart column of ARCS. A term of
validity of the chart is displayed in the “Expiry” column.
●[View old Edition]
As the latest edition is installed in the system, the older editions will not be displayed in the
source chart table.
Selecting this menu will show the older editions in the source chart table, and make it possible to
use them as desired.

Tool:
Note:
• This is an administration tool. Do not use this menu.
●[Selectable Filter]:
Filters the source charts to be displayed in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main
screen.
●[Clear Log]
Clears the log.
●[Option]:
Used to set options for “S-57”, “S-63”, “C-MAP Ed.2”, “C-MAP Ed.3”, “ARCS”, “Boot” and
“Advanced” panels.
●[Technical Tool]:
(An administration tool.)
●[Change Navigation & Planning]:
This item will be valid when [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] is selected from
the Navigation & Planning menu. Chart Portfolio will not be displayed. In order to redisplay the
Chart Portfolio, select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) Chart Portfolio] - [(2) Top Window] from the
Navigation & Planning menu.
Note:
• [Change Navigation & Planning] will only close the Chart Portfolio display. It will not exit
Chart Portfolio. In order to exit Chart Portfolio, left-click the [Exit] button.
• When C-MAP Ed.3 is installed in the system, it takes approximately 10 seconds for “Option”
panel of “Tool” menu to open after it was selected.
Version:
●[Chart Portfolio Version]:

Opens the version “Version” panel.

Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the
CD-ROM.
Starts importing/updating the charts.
Aborts the importing/updating processing.
Shows the detailed information of the chart being selected in the source or
system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating
process.
Exits the Chart Portfolio.

(3) Table view
Initially, chart table is displayed on the Chart Portfolio main screen, and the source charts read from
the CD-ROM are displayed in the source chart table. (If no CD-ROM is in the CD drive, no chart will
be displayed in the source chart table. In this case, insert a CD-ROM and left-click the [Auto Detect]
button.)
The Chart Portfolio main screen has two tables, the source chart table and system chart table. Each
table can be selected by left-clicking the respective tabs.
Source Chart table: Display the charts read from the CD-ROM.
System Chart table: Displays the stored charts in the system. When the source charts are
imported/updated, they are stored in the system and appear in the system
chart table.
S-57 Chart
[Source Chart Table]
Tabs
Chart : Name of the chart.

Scale : Scale of the chart. “1:overview” indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
successively in order of “2:general”, “3:coastal”, “4:approach”, “5:harbour” and
“6:berthing”.
UpNo. : Displayed in x-y format.
x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, “UpNo.3.0-8”
indicates that the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also
means that one base chart and 8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the
source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.

[System Chart Table]
“-” mark
“+” mark
Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
• Yes Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.
• No Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 “Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart”.
How to select a chart (file) from System Chart table:

For example, to select a chart from the folder “n30120”, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder “S57” twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder “S57” appear.
2) Left-click the folder “lon120” twice quickly.
The folders included in the folder “lon120” appear.
3) Left-click the folder “n30120”.
The charts included in the folder “n30120” are displayed in the table as shown above.
4) Left-click the desired chart in the table to select it.
• To close the folder “S57”, left-click it twice quickly.
You can also open/close the folder using the “+” and “-” marks in the folder tree.
• Left-clicking “+” mark opens the folder to show the lower-order folders included in it.
• Left-clicking “-” mark closes the folder to put back the lower-order folders into it.

S-63 Chart
Chart : Name of the chart

Scale : Scale of the chart. “1:overview” indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
successively in order of “2:general”, “3:coastal”, “4:approach”, “5:harbour” and “6:berthing”.
UpNo. : Displayed in x-y format.
x and y denote edition and update numbers, respectively. For example, “UpNo.3.0-8” indicates that
the base chart having edition No.3.0 has been updated 8 times. It also means that one base chart
and 8 update charts, that is, total of 9 charts are included in the source chart.
Publish : Date when the chart is published.
Permit : Shows the presence or absence of certification. S-63 requires SA Certificate file. (See 8.3.3
“Import/Update of S-63 Chart”.)
Only the charts that were certified by SA Certificate file are displayed on Source Chart Table. For
this reason, all the charts on the table have “Yes” in Permit column.

Last Update : The date when the chart was updated in Chart Portfolio.
Accepted :
• Yes Updated chart has been merged with the original chart.
• No Updated chart has not been merged with the original chart. Use Navigation & Planning screen
to merge them. See 3.11 “Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart”.

1) Left-click the folder “S57” twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder “S57” appear.
• To close the folder “S57”, left-click it twice quickly.

C-MAP Ed.2 Chart
Zone : List of zones.


Scale level : Scale: Scale of the chart. “A” indicates the smallest scale, with the scale being enlarged
successively in order of “B”, “C”, “D”, and “E”. “Z” is a worldwide chart.
Zone : Zone number.

1) Left-click the folder “CM93 Ed.2” twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder “CM93 Ed.2” appear.
• To close the folder “CM93 Ed.2”, left-click it twice quickly.

C-MAP Ed.3 Chart
Database : Name of the database.

Issue No : Issue number of the chart.

Name : Name of zone or area under contract.

Issue No : Issue number of the chart.
License : License number.
Expiry : Expiry date of license

For example, to select a chart from the folder “World”, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder “CM93 Ed.3” twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder “CM93 Ed.3” appear.
2) Left-click the folder “World” twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder “World” appear.
• To close the folder “CM93 Ed.3”, left-click it twice quickly.

ARCS Chart

Scale : Scale of the chart.
UpNo. : Update number.
Ed.Date : Date when the chart is published.
Service :
• NS (Navigator Service)
Indicates that the chart is provided under license agreement.
If the chart is updated during the term of agreement, update service is available.
• SS (Skipper Service)
Indicates that the chart was purchased.
Update service is not available.

Last Update/Expiry : Display of “Last Update” and “Expiry” can be changed over in the “View” menu.
• Last Update Date when the chart is updated in Chart Portfolio.
• Expiry Expiry date of the chart.

For example, to select a chart from the folder “NS”, follow the steps below:
1) Left-click the folder “ARCS” twice quickly.
Folders included in the folder “ARCS” appear.
2) Left-click the folder “NS” twice quickly.
The charts included in the folder “NS” appear.
• To close the folder “ARCS”, left-click it twice quickly.

8.3 Overview Flow Chart
8.3.1 Overview Flow Chart
The following flow charts describe the overview of import/update operation of the charts in Chart Portfolio.
(1) Import/update of S-57 chart
Start
Update CD
The type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import of chart (8.3.2.1) Update of chart (8.3.2.2)
YES
Other CDs to use?
NO
End

(2) Import/update of S-63 chart
Start
YES
SA Certificate file (such as primar.crt)
already imported?
NO
Import SA Certificate file (8.3.3.1)
Select SA Certificate file (8.3.3.2)
YES
Cell Permit already imported?
NO YES
New Cell Permit obtained?
Import Cell Permit (8.3.3.3)

NO
Update CD
Type of your CD-ROM?
Base CD
Import the chart (8.3.3.4) Update the chart (8.3.3.5)
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(3) Import/update of ARCS chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.4.1)
YES
Chart Permit already imported?
NO YES
New Chart Permit obtained?
Import Chart Permit. (8.3.4.2)

NO
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(4) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart
Start
Checkout (8.3.5.1)
YES
Permission already acquired?
NO
Acquire Permission (8.3.5.2)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
End

(5) Import/update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart
Import/update with CD
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
Update CD
Base CD
YES
Other CD to use?
NO
YES
YES
NO New Permission acquired?

NO
End

Update with e-mail
Start
Checkout (8.3.6.1)
YES
Base CD already installed?
NO
Import the chart (8.3.6.2)
YES
NO
Update the chart with e-mail

(8.3.6.4)
End

8.3.2 Import/Update of S-57 Chart
8.3.2.1 Import of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert S-57 CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

3) Left-click the [Import/Update] button.
The “Import Condition” panel opens.
[Import/Update] button

Import of S-57 chart is started.

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Log] button
Import result
Number of charts imported
Total number of charts to be imported

(Updated charts are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the capacity
of the chart files already processed.

5) After the import is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(2) Left-click the [Exit] button.
(1) Check that the import is completed.

8.3.2.2 Update of S-57 Chart in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert S-57 UPDATE CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-57] in that order.
S-57 chart list is displayed.
S-57 chart list
If S-57 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.


Update of S-57 chart is started.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with
Navigation & Planning. (See 3.11 “Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.”)

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Log] button
Update result
Number of charts updated
Total number of charts to be updated

(Charts updated previously are counted in.)
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the capacity

5) After the update process is completed, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
(1) Check that the update is completed.

8.3.3 Import/Update of S-63 Chart
Note:
• ECDIS can use the charts published by more than one data server (PRIMAR STAVANGER, UKHO,
Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.). It is necessary,
however, to import and select SA Certificate file to the system each time charts provided by a new
data server are used. Before importing the charts, for certification of ENC, import and select SA
Certificate file contained in Chart CD-ROM provided by the data server.
8.3.3.1 Import of SA Certificate file

1) Start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
The “Option” panel opens.
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import of Certificate...] button.
The “Find file” panel opens.

4) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the “Drive” combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the “Directory” list box (b).

7) Double-click the file name of SA Certificate (such as “primar.crt”) in the “File name” list box (c).
8) Check the file name, and left-click the [OK] button.
The “Import of SA Certificate” panel opens.
Check the file name you have selected.

9) Check the SA Certificate information, and left-click the [OK] button.
Check the information of SA Certificate.

(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
10) As the message box appears, left-click the [OK] button to close the box.
Import procedure is completed.
“1” in “[1:primar.crt]” indicates the order of adding CRT file.

“primar.crt” indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(“primar.crt” for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, “iho.crt” for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)

8.3.3.2 Selection of SA Certificate file
3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Select of Certificate...] button.
The “Select of SA Certificate” panel opens.
4) Select the SA Certificate of the data server to import or update charts.

(By default, 0:IHO.CRT of Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard
is selected.)

5) Check the information of SA Certificate, and left-click the [OK] button.
Check the information of SA Certificate.

(This information is of PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO.)
6) Check the file name of SA Certificate (such as [1:primar.crt]), and left-click the [OK] button to
close the panel.
“1” in “[1:primar.crt]” indicates the order of adding CRT file.

“primar.crt” indicates the file name.
The file name varies depending on the data server.
(“primar.crt” for PRIMAR STAVENGER or UKHO, “iho.crt” for Hydrographic
and Oceanographic Department of Japan Coast Guard, etc.)
8.3.3.3 Import of Cell Permit


3) Left-click the [S-63] tab, and then, the [Import Cell Permit...] button.
4) Insert Cell Permit CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and wait until it is ready to be read.
5) Select [D:] (D drive) from the “Drive” combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
6) Double-click [D:] in the “Directory” list box (b).

7) Double-click the file name of Cell Permit (such as “PERMIT.TXT”) in the “Filen ame” list box (c).
Note:
• When Cell Permit is supplied in FD, insert it into the FD drive, and select [A:] (A drive).

9) As the “Completed” panel appears, left-click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the “Option” panel.
10) Check the number of chart license, and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Import procedure of S-63 Cell Permit is completed.
Check the number of chart license.

8.3.3.4 Import of S-63 Chart
1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
• Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the
number of chart license.

The “Import Condition” panel opens.
S-63 chart list

The “S-57/S-63 Import/Update” panel opens.
Note:
• If the BASE version includes UPDATE information (such as PRIMAR STAVENGER or
UKHO), a panel as shown below opens, so left-click the [OK] button.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update
with Navigation & Planning.
Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.

Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Log] button
Import result
Number of charts imported Total number of charts to be imported excluding invalid ones

5) Check that the import is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.
8.3.3.5 Update of S-63 Chart

1) Insert S-63 Chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [S-63(Offline)] in that order.
S-63 chart list will appear in several minutes.
Note:
• Decoding of chart and checking of permission start.
This processing takes several minutes or more (30 minutes, for example) depending on the
number of chart license.

S-63 chart list

The “S-57/S-63 Import/Update” panel opens.
* If you left-click the [Cancel] button, confirm the chart display, and accept the chart update with
Navigation & Planning. (See 3.11 “Accepting S-57 Updating Chart.”)

Structure, format and validity of the chart are checked.
Left-clicking the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Log] button
Update result

Number of charts updated
Total number of charts to be updated excluding invalid ones
5) Check that the update is completed, and then, left-click the [Exit] button to exit Chart Portfolio.

8.3.4 Import/Update of ARCS Chart
8.3.4.1 Checkup of ARCS
Expiry date of license (Chart Permit)
The license (Chart Permit) has an expiry date.
(d) (a) (b) (c)
Course of time
Present date One month One month
Expiry date of license
(a) For 30 days before the expiry date of license

A warning message is displayed for 30 days before the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 “Alarm
Information of ARCS Chart”.
(b) For 30 days after the expiry date of license

An error message is displayed for 30 days after the expiry date of license. See 14.2.1 “Alarm
Information of ARCS Chart”.
The license is invalid, but ARCS chart can be displayed without any problem.
(c) From 30 days after the expiry date onward

An error message is displayed. The license is invalid, and ARCS chart cannot be displayed. See
14.2.1 “Alarm Information of ARCS Chart”.
(d) If ARCS chart has been displayed normally but will not be displayed from a certain point of time,
either of the following may be the cause.
• ARCS chart you have used was the trial version (available free of charge for 3 months).
• The details of the license agreement were changed.
Note:
• For the details of the license agreement, contact the owner of the vessel.

8.3.4.2 Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio
(1) Import of ARCS chart permit
1) Insert the ARCS license FD into the FD drive, and start Chart Portfolio.
2) Select [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit] in that order.
The “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel opens.
3) Left-click the [Browse...] button.

4) Select [A:] (A drive) from the “Drive” combo box (a) as shown below.
(c) (b)
(a)
5) Double-click [A:] in the “Directory” list box (b).

6) Double-click the file name of ARCS license (such as “gb.ncp”) in the “File name” list box (c).

The display returns to the “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel.

Import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed.
Note:
• After the import of ARCS Chart Permit is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file.
While the file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of “Chart Portfolio” screen is in gray color
and disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40
minutes at the most.)

(2) Checking of ARCS chart permit
2) Left-click the [ARCS] tab to check the license information.
The number of licensed ARCS

charts
ARCS license is not imported.

3) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
The “ARCS License Information” panel opens.
4) The following license information is displayed.

Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

(3) Import of ARCS chart
1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Import of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the import result.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button
Import result
Number of imported charts Total number of charts to be imported
Progress meter shows the progress of the import processing according to the number

Note:
• After the import of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While the
file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of “Chart Portfolio” screen is in gray color and
disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes
at the most.)

8.3.4.3 Update of ARCS in Chart Portfolio
1) Insert ARCS chart CD-ROM into the CD drive.
2) Select [Sort] - [ARCS] in that order.
ARCS chart list is displayed.
ARCS chart update list
If ARCS chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Update of ARCS chart is started.
Left-clicking of the [Log] button will show the update result.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button
Update result
Number of updated charts Total number of charts to be updated
Progress meter shows the progress of the update processing according to the number

Note:
• After the update of ARCS chart is completed, Chart Portfolio prepares an ARCS index file. While
the file preparation is in progress, the [Exit] button of “Chart Portfolio” screen is in gray color and
disabled. Exit Chart Portfolio after the index file is completed. (It takes approximately 40 minutes
at the most.)

8.3.5 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart
8.3.5.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.2
Setting of work area
2) Left-click the [Advanced] tab, and then, left-click the [Advanced Option...] button.
The “Advanced Option” panel opens.

3) Set the work area.
“Use work area for C-MAP” check box.
“Use work area for C-MAP” check box is blank. (Default)

[Merit]
Less time is required for import processing. (It takes approximately 5-6 hours to
import the charts worldwide.)
[Demerit]
Change of Chart CDs is required every one or two hours.
“Use work area for C-MAP” check box is checked.

[Merit]
Once the full chart data (3 CDs) is copied (it takes only 30 minutes), there is no need
of changing of CDs thereafter.
[Demerit]
Import processing takes long time. (It takes approximately 8 hours to import the
charts worldwide.)
Note:
• Recommended setting of “Use work area for C-MAP” check box is “blank”.

8.3.5.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio
(1) Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE)
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
The “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel opens.
2) Select [First use C-MAP Ed.2, or change subscription zone/areas.], and left-click the [Next>]
button.
3) Insert C-MAP Ed.2 CD-ROM into the CD drive.

4) Left-click the [Next>] button.

5) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button. Then, left-click the [Next>]
button.
Left-click the [(4) Add [>>]] button.
Select zones or areas.
6) Send USER CODE to C-MAP by e-mail or fax.

You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE from C-MAP.
USER CODE
(1) Send USER CODE.
(2) You will have AUTHORIZATION CODE.
User Send to : C-MAP Norway C-MAP

e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701

7) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.2] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
The “C-MP Authorization Wizard” panel opens.
8) Select [Register AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP], and left-click the [Next>]
button.
9) Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP, and left-click the [OK] button to close the
panel.
Acquisition of AUTHORIZATION CODE is completed.
Enter AUTHORIZATION CODE

received from C-MAP.

(2) Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart
1) Select [Sort] - [C-MAP Ed.2] in that order.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list is displayed.
C-MAP Ed.2 chart list

Import of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button Import result
Number of imported charts Total number of charts to be imported

Note:
• If the following error message is displayed, it indicates that you have entered a wrong
AUTHORIZATION CODE. Enter the AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP again.
Example for error message

8.3.5.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio

Update of C-MAP Ed.2 chart is started.
[Import/Update] button [Log] button Update result
Number of updated charts Total number of charts to be updated


8.3.6 Import/Update of C-MAP Ed.3
8.3.6.1 Checkup of C-MAP Ed.3
Expiry date of license (e-Token)
The license has an expiry date.
(a) (b)
Present date Course of time

Two months
(a) For 60 days before the expiry date of license

The following message is displayed for 60 days before the expiry date of license.
(b) After the expiry date of license

The following message is displayed. The chart is displayed only for 15 minutes after it is started.
Note:
• If the message (a) or (b) above is displayed, the license should be updated. Contact a C-MAP
dealer.

8.3.6.2 Import of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio
(1) Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

Import of C-MAP Ed.3 chart is started.

[Log] button
Import result

(2) Acquisition of Permission
2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
The “Registration Wizard” panel opens.
3) Select [Ordering], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Ordering].

4) Select zones or areas, and left-click the [Add->] button. Then and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Left-click the [Add->] button.
Select zones or areas.
Check [Purchase] as needed.

(In this case, any update services cannot be used.)
5) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.

6) Check the order information, and left-click the [Save] button.
The “Browse for Folder” panel opens.
Check the order information.

7) Select the FD drive where the order information is saved, and left-click the [OK] button to close
the panel. The name of the saved file is “order.txt”.
Select the FD drive.
8) Send the saved order information (order.txt) to C-MAP by e-mail.

If the e-mail is not available, write down the order information, and send it by fax.
You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
(1) Send “order.txt” you have saved..
(2) You will have a license issued by C-MAP.
User Send to : C-MAP Norway C-MAP

e-mail address :
license @c-map.no
Fax No. : +47 51464701

(3) Loading of eToken license
2) Left-click the [C-MAP Ed.3] tab, and then, [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
3) Select [Regist License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Regist License].

4) Select [Add License form file], and left-click the [Load] button.
The “Select License file” panel opens.
Select [Add License from file]
5) Insert the eToken license FD into the FD drive.

6) Select [password.usr], and left-click the [Open(O)] button.
The “Information” panel opens.
Select “password.usr”.
7) Check that the loading is completed, and left-click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the “Registration Wizard” panel opens.
Check that the loading

is completed

9) A message indicating the completion of license registration appears. (It takes several seconds
for the message to appear.)
Then, left-click the [Order/Regist/Confirm License...] button.
Message indicating the completion

of license registration.

10) Select [Confirm License], and left-click the [Next(N)] button.
Select [Confirm License].
11) Check the license information, and left-click the [Close] button.
Check the license information.

(Information at left is a sample.)

13) Exit Chart Portfolio.
(4) Checking of chart display

1) Left-click [ ] in the startup menu to start Navigation & Planning.

2) Left-click the [MENU] button, and select [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS...] in
that order.
The “Chart Option” panel opens.
3) Left-click the [View Common] tab.

If the “World” check box is blank, check it.
Check the “World” check box.

6) Left-click the [View 1] tab, and select [C-MAP Ed.3].
Finally, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
[View 1] tab Select [C-MAP Ed.3].

8.3.6.3 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart in Chart Portfolio
If C-MAP Ed.3 chart list is not displayed, left-click the [Auto Detect] button.

[Log] button
Update result

8.3.6.4 Update of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart with E-mail
(1) What is the RTU (Real Time Updating) service?
RTU (Real Time Updating) service updates C-MAP Ed.3 chart via e-mail or Internet through the
C-MAP RTU server.
Update with e-mail
(1) Order (2) E-mail sent
ECDIS User C-MAP RTU

server
(1) Create an order file (e.g., JRC eT 30001.ord) with Chart Portfolio, and save the order file on a
floppy disk.
(2) Attach the order file to e-mail, and send it to the RTU server (E-mail: updates@c-map.no).
(4) Update of charts (3) Reply e-mail sent
ECDIS User C-MAP RTU

server
(3) Pieces of reply e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically
sent by the RTU server.
(4) Save the update files on a floppy disk or CD-R/RW, and update C-MAP Ed.3 chart with Chart
Portfolio.
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server

E-mail: updates@c-map.no

(2) Update of C-MAP Ed.3 chart with e-mail
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP Ed.3] - [Update Charts] in that order.
The “C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail] button.
The “C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Create Chart Update Order to send via E-mail” panel opens.
eToken number
(This number is given as an example.)
3) Insert an empty FD into the FD drive.

4) Select the Database to be updated from the “Database” list box (a).
5) Select the Zones or Areas to be updated from the “Available” list box (b), and left-click the [>]
button (c).
6) Select a file size from the “Select e-mail size” combo box (d). The update files from the RTU
server are received in the selected size. [Recommended size: 1.44MB (Floppy)]
7) Left-click the [Create] button.
An order file is created, and the “Select drive” panel opens.
(a)
(b) (c)
(d)
Check this check box to select all signing Zones/Areas with

the Database selected in (a). (Recommended)
8) Select the FD drive where the order file is saved, and left-click the [OK] button.
Select the FD drive.

The name of the saved file is “JRC eT *****.ord.” (*****: eToken number)
(This file name is given as an example.)
10) Attach the saved order file “JRC eT *****.ord” to e-mail and send it to the C-MAP RTU server.
Pieces of e-mail with an update file (e.g., u001x002.ans) being attached are automatically send
by the RTU server.
(1) Send the order file you have saved.
(2) You will receive update files from the C-MAP

RTU server.
User C-MAP RTU server
E-mail address of C-MAP RTU server: updates@c-map.no
Note:
• Confirm that an update file (*.ans) is attached to each piece of received e-mail.
• Update file rule (splitting into parts of the file size set when an order is placed.)
uXXXxYYY.ans
YYY: File count
XXX: File number
Example: Division into four split files

u001x004.ans
u002x004.ans
u003x004.ans
u004x004.ans
11) Save the received update files on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).
Note:
• Be sure to save the update files in the root directory on a floppy disk (CD-R/RW).

12) Insert the floppy disk (CD-R/RW) containing the update files into the FD (CD) drive.
13) Left-click the [Apply Chart Update from Files] button.
A message box appears.
The message at left appears when the update files exist on

the floppy disk or CD-R/RW.
(Drive D for CD-R/RW)

16) Left-click the [Apply Updates] button.
Update of charts is started.
Searches the floppy disk

or CD-R/RW for the up-
date files.
The location where update files To use update files at another location,
are saved is displayed. left-click the [Browse] button and specify
the location.
The message at left is displayed while chart

update is in progress. The update may take
several minutes.
17) When the update is completed, the following message box appears. Left-click the [OK] button.
Note:
• If there are disks containing update files, repeat steps 16 and 17 to apply all the update files.

18) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “C-MAP Chart Update - Apply Chart Update from Files”
panel.
19) Left-click the [Review Updates] button.

The “C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review Updates” panel opens.

20) Select Database.
The details of Database are displayed in the lower field.
Database selection
Details of Database

Select the details of Database and right-click. The items below can be executed.
: Hydrographic Office
: Chart name
: Unit of update
: Object
Refresh Updates the details of Database.

Reject selected Rejects the update of selected data in the tree structure.
Delete mark of update (Cannot be selected at present.)
Double-clicking an object . displays the details of the object. (The display takes several tens
of seconds.)
Details of object

21) After confirming the update, click the [Close] button of the “C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update - Review
Updates” panel.
22) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “C-MAP ED.3 Chart Update” panel.
23) Left-click the [Exit] button to close [Chart Portfolio].
Left-click the [Exit] button.

8.4 Editing Operations (For C-MAP Ed.2)
8.4.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)
To enable selectable filter which is used to filter the source charts displayed in the source chart table, you
need to set the selectable filter to ON state beforehand.
1) Select [Edit] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.

Each time you select it, “Selectable Filter” is turned ON and OFF. When it is selected, the check
mark is attached to “Selectable Filter”.
8.4.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)

1) Select [Edit] - [Select All] in that order.
Then, the all cell/zones in the source chart table are selected for importing/updating.
8.4.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)

1) Select [Edit] - [Delete] in that order.
You can delete the selected system chart.

8.5 Filtering the Source Charts
(For C-MAP Ed.2)
You can filter the source charts in the source chart table. With this function, you can easily find the
charts you want to import/update.
1) Be sure that the selectable filter function is set to ON state. See 8.4.1 “Selectable Filter ON/OFF
Selection (Selectable Filter)” mentioned above.
2) Be sure that the source chart table is open. If not, left-click the “Source Charts” tab in the Chart
Portfolio main screen.
3) Select [Tool] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Then, the “Selectable Filter” panel opens.
Select filtering conditions by left-clicking the options.

• Zone (Use only C-MAP):
Select one of items by left-clicking it.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Selectable Filter” panel.

When the system enters the Chart Portfolio or when you left-click the [Auto Detect] button, the
source charts are filtered with the set filtering condition, and thus filtered source charts are
displayed in the source chart table.

8.6 View Operations
8.6.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information])
You can get information about the source chart or system chart.
1) Left-click one of charts in the source/system chart table, and then, left-click the [Information]
button on the screen.
Then, the “Chart Information” panel opens.
You can see the detailed information on that chart.

8.6.2 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)
1) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
Then, the validity of the ARCS license on the chart permit file (ARCS chart permit FD) is
checked.
If the ARCS license is valid, the “ARCS License Information” panel opens, and the license
information is displayed.
If the ARCS license is invalid, blank is displayed in this panel.
8.6.3 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio

1) Select [Version] - [Chart Portfolio Version] in that order.
Then, the version information panel will be displayed.

8.7 Setting the Chart Portfolio
You can change various settings for Chart Portfolio with the “Option” panel.
8.7.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update

Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “S-57” tab to the “S-57” panel as shown above.
Left-click either option.

• in Chart Portfolio: Updating is done in the Chart Portfolio. Namely, the updating charts are
merged with the original charts stored in the system after importing.
The “Accepted” column in the system chart table shows whether the
updating chart is already merged or not. (“Yes” in the Accepted column
shows that the imported chart is already merged with the original chart.
While, “No” shows that the imported chart is not merged with the original
chart yet.)
Select either “Every Media” or “Every Chart” by left-clicking it.
• in Navigation & Planning:

Updating of the chart is not performed until you merge it on the
Navigation & Planning screen. In this case, you can merge the updating
chart on the Navigation & Planning screen. To merge it, “Accept S-57
Updates” menu will be used. For detailed descriptions, see 3.11
“Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart”.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8.7.2 Setting the S-63 Options
2) Left-click the “S-63” tab to open the “S-63” panel.
Shows User Permit.

8.7.3 Setting the C-MAP Options
2) Left-click the “C-MAP” tab to open the “C-MAP” panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

• “You are Licensed.”
• “You are NOT licensed.”
• “You not register Authorization code.”
Select one of options, “List and select Zone (Recommend)” or “List and select 20deg Square”.
• List and select Zone (Recommend):
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in the zone unit.
• List and select 20 deg Square:
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in 20x20 degrees unit.
• [Register, confirm User/Authorized Code] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the following “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel. For
detailed operation, see (1) “Acquisition of Permission (AUTHORIZATION CODE)” in 8.3.5.2
“Import of C-MAP Ed.2 Chart in Chart Portfolio”.
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel.

8.7.4 Setting the ARCS Options
2) Left-click the “ARCS” tab to open the “ARCS” panel.
Shows one of the license statuses.

• “You have xxx chart(s) license.”
xxx: Number of permission
• “You are NOT licensed.”
• [Import/Regist Chart Permit] button:

Left-clicking this button will open the “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel. For detailed operation,
see (1) “Import of ARCS chart permit” in 8.3.4.2 “Import of ARCS in Chart Portfolio”.
8.7.5 Setting the Boot Options

You can set various options that determine the operation when the system enters the Chart
Portfolio.
2) Left-click the “Boot” tab to open the “Boot” panel.
You can select options by left-clicking them.

• Automatic Import/Update:
Importing/Updating is automatically made when the Chart Portfolio is started.
• Use Selectable Filter:
Source charts are filtered by the set filtering conditions when the Chart Portfolio is started.

8.7.6 Setting the Advanced Options
2) Left-click the “Advanced” tab to open the “Advanced” panel.
Select the following option by left-clicking it.

• Sounds alarm(beep) after importing/updating completed:
Turns on/off the occurrence of alarm when import/update is completed. For the volume control
of the alarm sound, see 3.25 “Setting the Alarm Options”.
• [Advanced Option] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the “Advanced Option” panel.
Specify the S-57 or S-63

source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.2

source chart path.
Specify the C-MAP Ed.3

source chart path.
Specify the ARCS source

chart path.
If you use multiple CDs to

install C-MAP, copy all
information from the CD-Rs
to the work area before
installation.
Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Advanced Option” panel.
Note:
• If “Use work area for C-MAP” check box is checked, import/update will take 2 to 3 times longer than
otherwise.

9
Playback
9-1
In the Playback, you can play back the logging data. The Playback screen is almost the same as for
Navigation & Planning. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the Navigation & Planning
screen except for the [(9) Playback] menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some
submenus you cannot use in the Playback.
9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback

(1) Entering the Playback
1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [POWER] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.
[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the “ ” in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for Navigation & Planning will open and the “Staring Date/Time”
panel is displayed.
Note:
• The [Startup Screen] will be automatically displayed if no operation is conducted for 10
seconds.
9 Playback 9-2
Special menu for playback:
In the Navigation & Planning screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback, [(9)
Playback] is used, instead.
Displays the “Starting Date/Time” panel.
Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.

Turns ON/OFF the “Playback” panel.
Table 9 Menu Tree

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Selectable*
(1) Cursor (1) Scroll ○
(2) Zoom Area ○
(3) High Resolution Area ○
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered ○
(2) Floating ○
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered ○
(2) Floating ○
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) ○
(2) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) ○
(7) Running Fix ○
(8) Remove Running Fix ○
(9) Activate AIS ○
(1) Deactivate AIS ○
(2) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information ○
(3) Other Information ○
(4) Maneuver Curve ○
(5) Remove Maneuver Curve ○
(6) Cross Bearing... ○
(0) Option... ○
(2) Chart (1) Marking / Highlighting (1) Event-Mark ×
(2) Information Mark ×
(3) Tidal Stream Mark ×
(4) Highlight ×
(5) Delete Event-Mark... ×
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position... ○
(2) Add to my Port List... ○
(3) My Port List... ○
(4) Home ○
(3) ARCS (1) Select Chart under Cursor ○
(2) Select Chart from all... ○
9-3 9 Playback
Table 9 Menu Tree -- Continued
(2) Chart (3) Change Active Panel ○
(4) Load Low Resolution ○
(5) Note and Diagram ○
(6) Temporary and Preliminary ○
(7) Adjust Datum Offset... ○
(8) Datum Transformation... ○
(4) Select S-57 Chart... ○
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart... ○
(2) Chart Editor... ×
(3) Unselect User Charts ×
(6) Manual UpDating... ○
(7) Scale (1) Select Scale... ○
(2) Select Range... ○
(3) Zoom In ○
(4) Zoom Out ○
(8) Azimuth (1) North Up ○
(2) Course Up ○
(3) Rotation ○
(9) Motion (1) True ○
(2) Relative ○
(3) Free ○
(1) Fix View ○
(2) Accept S-57 Updates ○
(3) Print Display ○
(4) Save Screen ○
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS... ○
(2) Other Charts... ○
(3) Scale... ○
(3) Ship (1) Adjust (1) Cursor ×
(2) Enter Position... ×
(3) Enter Offset... ×
(4) Clear Offset ×
(0) Option... ○
(4) View (1) Day-Night (1) Day Bright ○
(2) Day Whiteback ○
(3) Day Blackback ○
(4) Dusk ○
(5) Night ○
(6) Panel Dimmer ×
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 ×
(2) Radar 2 ×
(3) Range Rings ×
(3) ARPA / AIS (1) ARPA1 ○
(2) ARPA2 ○
9 Playback 9-4
(4) View (3) Internal ARPA ×
(4) AIS ○
(5) ALL ○
(6) ARPA Release All ×
(7) Deactivate All AIS ×
(8) ALL List ○
(9) Select List ○
(4) Analog Meter ○
(5) Logbook ×
(6) Multi View (1) Single View ×
(2) Top Bottom ×
(3) Right Left ×
(4) Right Top View ×
(5) Left Top View ×
(6) Right Bottom View ×
(7) Left Bottom View ×
(8) Select Area ×
(9) Wide Range View ○
(0) Option (1) Radar... ○
(2) ARPA/AIS... ×
(3) Display Panel... ○
(4) Logbook... ×
(5) Voyage Distance Clear ○
(6) Date / Time... ×
(5) Route (1) Select Route... ×
(2) Unload Route ×
(3) Select Next WP... ×
(4) Create Alternate Route ×
(5) Planning (1) Table Editor ×
(2) Graphic Editor ×
(6) Calculate Distance to Run ×
(0) Option... ○
(6) Auto Sail (1) Start... ×
(2) Stop ×
(3) Start Avoiding ×
(4) Stop Avoiding ×
(0) Option... ×
(7) Alarm (1) List... ○
(2) History... ○
(0) Option... ×
(8) Tool (1) File Manager... ○
(2) Chart Portfolio... (1) Create ×
(2) Top Window ×
9-5 9 Playback
(8) Tool (3) Chart Abbreviation ○
(4) Navigation Data Graphs... ○
(5) Set User Key ○
(6) Bilingual ×
(9) Playback (1) Starting Data/Time ○
(2) Start ○
(3) Pause ○
(4) Stop ○
(5) Playback Panel ○
(0) Exit ○
*Selectable ○: You can select in Playback.
×: You can’t select in Playback.
9 Playback 9-6
(2) Exiting the Playback
1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for Navigation &
Planning screen.
●Display panels for playback operation
[For S-57/C-MAP] [For ARCS]
9-7 9 Playback
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data
(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the “Starting Date/Time” panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)
Logging data drop-down list*1
Date and time of recording end

Date and time of recording start
Selection of date and time to be played

back*2
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)
*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were
recorded are displayed.
2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK]
button.
(2) Displaying the Playback Panel

1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the “Playback panel” panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is
ON, the panel appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.
[Pause] Button
[Start] Button [Stop] Button
[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the
“Start Date/Time” panel as shown above.
[Playback Speed Select] Button

Left-click this drop-down list button and then select
the playback speed you want by left-clicking it.
• Even if the “Playback Panel” panel is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from
the menu.
9 Playback 9-8
(3) Starting playback
1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the “Playback Panel”.
Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging
data.
Playback Statues:
• Stop: Shows “STOP” in red.
• During playback: Shows “PLAY” in red.
• When paused: Shows “PAUSE” in red.
2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.

• To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again.
9-9 9 Playback
10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
10-1
Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.
Checking or repair by an unqualified person may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
Contact our head office, or a nearby branch or local office to request servicing.
If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off

the power before starting checking.
If a fan alarm or CPU temperature rise alarm has occurred, immediately

turn off the power.
Keeping the equipment in operation may cause a fire or a malfunction.
After turning off the power, contact our head office, or a nearby branch or
local office to request servicing.
To clean the surface of the equipment, do not use any organic solvent such
as thinner or benzene, as this may deteriorate the surface coating.
Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe off dirt and dust thoroughly from the surface
of the equipment.
Notes:
• Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene, alcohol, gasoline,
thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will cause the LCD surface to be
damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube
lightly.
10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-2

10.1 Confirming Alarm
If a “HARD” alarm occurs, a hardware failure has been detected in this system.
Perform the following confirmation procedure:
(1) Confirmation procedure

1) Display the alarm list and read the detailed information.
(For how to display the alarm list, see 3.3.7 “How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”.)
2) After reading the detailed information displayed in red, immediately perform the shutdown
process to turn off the power.
3) Ask the JRC sales representative or our local office for repair, reporting the alarm information.
(2) Explanation of hardware alarm messages

CPU Fan failed : The CPU fan has been stopped. (Repair needed)
CPU Temp rising : The CPU temperature has risen too high. (Repair needed)
Main Power supply Fan failed : The power supply unit (CBD-1627) fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
ATX Power supply Fan failed : The ATX power supply unit fan has been stopped. (Repair
needed)
LCD Fan failed : The monitor fan of the display panel’s chassis (CWB-1210) has
been stopped. (Repair needed)
Rack Fan failed : The rack fan has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK1 failed : Hard disk 1 has failed. (Repair needed)
DISK2 failed : Hard disk 2 has failed. (Repair needed)
10-3 10 Maintenance and Inspection

10.2 Daily Maintenance
The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily
maintenance. To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it
daily. This also prevents the unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.
Maintenance and Inspection Method

No. Item Inspection Item
1 Cleaning • Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth. In
particular, wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.
2 Inspection • Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the monitor to make sure that the
brightness of the monitor increases.
• Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the monitor to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
• Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
• Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure
that dials operate smoothly.
• Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the
lighting on the panel changes correctly.
• Select [Color Pattern] to display the color test pattern, and adjust the
brightness/contrast. Also make sure that the necessary colors come
out on the monitor.
• Select [Gray Scale] to display the gray scale pattern, and make sure that
the gray scale is displayed correctly.

10.2.1 Color Pattern (S-57)
The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select the “Color Pattern” in the startup menu.

The color pattern becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu] [Color Pattern]
The color pattern can be displayed using any of the five color tables.
This color pattern is intended:
(a) for use by the mariner to check and if necessary re-adjust the brilliance and contrast
controls, particularly for use at night.
(b) for use by the mariner to satisfy himself that an again ECDIS CRT remains capable of
providing the necessary color differentiation.
(c) for initial color verification of the day-black-background, dusk and night color table.
2) Right-click to see the pop-up menu.
Day Bright: A “day-time” color pattern will be displayed.

Day Whiteback: A “relatively bright” color pattern will be displayed.
Day Blackback: A color pattern against a “black background” will be displayed.
Dusk: A “relatively dark” color pattern will be displayed.
Night: A “night-time” color pattern will be displayed.
Exit: Exit the color pattern display and return to the startup menu.
3) Left-click on [Exit] from the pop-up menu to exit the color pattern.

10.2.2 Gray Scale
A gray scale pattern is displayed to check the brightness adjustment of the monitor.
Optimum brightness of the monitor can be obtained by adjusting the brightness so that the gray scale
pattern can be viewed clearly. The brightness of the monitor in the nighttime can also be optimally
adjusted in the same way.
1) Select the “Gray Scale” in the startup menu.

The gray scale becomes activated.
[Stertup Menu] [Gray Scale]
2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale. The startup menu will start up.

10.3 Replacing Consumables
The hard disk, UPS battery and LCD backlight used in this system have a limited service life, so that they
should better be replaced periodically.
The expected service life of these parts if the system is used constantly are as follows:
Number Part Nominal life Remarks

1 Hard disk Two years When the power supply is on constantly.
2 UPS battery Five years When the power supply is on constantly. If the
system is not used for long periods and battery
charging/discharging is repeated, then the nominal life
may be shorter.
3 LCD backlight Five years When the power supply is on constantly.
Please consult with the store, sales agent or our branch office, sales offices or outlets for replacing the
above parts.
10.4 The PWR FAIL Lamp and Power Supply Input

When AC power supply is stopped due to a blackout or the like, nothing is displayed on the monitor, but
the display information is backed up for one minute. If AC power is not supplied when one minute has
passed, the system will automatically start the shutdown process to terminate all the functions.
The following table shows the relations between the PWR FAIL lamp states and alarm sound while AC
power is not being supplied:
Inboard Backup Power Supply (24 VDC) PWR FAIL Lamp Alarm Sound
*1
Connected Blinking Yes *2
Not connected No change No
*1: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key changes the lamp state to “lighted.” The lamp goes off when AC
power is supplied.
*2: Pressing the [PWR ACK] key stops the alarm.

10.5 User Maintenance Menu
10.5.1 Backup Option
When you left-click the [ ] button on the Startup menu and the following message is displayed, change
the setting of the user-maintenance menu by the following procedure.
1) Move the cursor on the Startup menu. And right-click.
2) Password is required.
3) Input “0000” as the password.

4) The Startup menu is enhanced, and the
user maintenance menu is displayed.
5) Left-click [BackUp Option] button.
Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and Default setting.

F: drive) Data is read out from E:drive (Disk1).
Data is written into E:drive (Disk1) and F:drive (Disk2).
Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive) Only E:drive (DISK1) is used.
Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive) Only E:drive (DISK1) is used.
Drive Information Total capacity and free space of the disk are displayed.
File Information Volumes of Chart, Logging Data, and User files saved in
the system are displayed.

* When the setting of present is “Dual drive (DISK1 and 2 - E: and F: drive)”, select “F: drive”.
* When the setting of present is “Master drive (DISK1 - E: drive)”, select “F: drive”.
* When the setting of present is “Backup drive (DISK2 - F: drive)”, select “E: drive”.
* To copy data from the master disk to the backup disk, left-click the button of either.
[to Backup drive except charts…]:Data except charts are copied.
[to Backup drive including charts...]:Data including charts are copied.
6) Left-click [OK] button.

7) Left-click [Hide] button.
10.5.2 Hardware Key Information

This function is useful for comfirming USER PERMIT and PIN No.
These information will be needed as purchasing ARCS chart.

10.6 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before
you ask for repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is
not in order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.
Symptom Cause Remedy

Power does not turn ON. The AC power is not ON. Turn the AC power ON.
The breaker in the main unit Turn the breaker ON. *
power supply is not ON.
When 220V input is being used, Switch the input protective
the input protective circuit switch circuit switch to AC 220V.
of the power supply is set to AC
110V.
AC power is not being input Input AC power within the rated
within the rated range. range.
The AC power cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected to the main unit. representative for repair.
Malfunction of main unit. Call the JRC sales
representative for repair.
“POWER FAIL” lamp is lit. DC power is not being supplied Supply DC power from the
from the distribution board. distribution board.
The AC voltage has dropped. Input AC voltage within the rated
range.
The main unit has Call the JRC sales
malfunctioned. representative for repair.
* Lift the lever to turn the breaker ON.
Breaker
ON: Up
OFF: Down

“FAN” alarm message is The fan motor has stopped. Immediately turn the power OFF,
displayed on the LCD monitor. and contact the nearest JRC
office or agent, and ask for
repair.
Nothing is displayed on screen. The power switch is not ON. Turn the power switch ON.
The monitor has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales

The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected. representative for repair.
Incorrect display The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected. (terminal fault) representative for repair.
The display is shown out of The initial setup was faulty. For JAN-701, keep the brilliance
place. control pressed for a while. The
display will be adjusted
automatically.
For JAN-901M, press the
brilliance control. The display
will be adjusted automatically.
Radar echo is not displayed The video cable is not Call the JRC sales
correctly. connected. (terminal fault) representative for repair.
The connector cable is not Call the JRC sales
connected to the radar. representative for repair.
Chart Portfolio is working. Stop Chart Portfolio.
Gyro compass is not displayed, The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
and "GYRO" alarm is carried out correctly. correctly.
displayed. The gyro compass is not ON. Turn the gyro compass ON.
The connector cable is not Check the connection between

connected to the gyro compass. the gyro compass and main unit.
The ratio setting on the gyro Set the ratio setting on the gyro
compass is incorrect. compass correctly.
The polarities of the connector Connect the cable at the correct
cable are incorrect. polarities.

Rudder angle is not displayed. The rudder angle indicator is not Turn the rudder angle indicator
Or, is not displayed correctly. ON. ON.
The ratio setting on the rudder Set the ratio setting on the
angle is incorrect. rudder angle.
The rudder angle indicator Set the rudder angle indicator
setting is incorrect. correctly.
connected to the rudder angle the rudder angle indicator and
indicator. the main unit.
Log is not displayed. The log is not ON. Turn the log ON.
The ratio setting on the log is Set the ratio setting on the log
incorrect. correctly.
connected to the log. the log and the main unit.
Data is not displayed, even The analog data setup has not Carry out the analog data setup
though the data below is input. been set correctly. correctly.
• Relative wind direction and The interface board is not ON. Turn the interface board ON.
wind speed
• Air temperature The connector cable is not Check the connection between
• Water temperature connected to the interface the interface board and the main
• Pitch board. unit.
• Roll The main unit has Call the JRC sales
• CPP angle malfunctioned. representative for repair.
Position information (e.g. GPS, The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
gyro) is not displayed. carried out correctly. correctly.
The navigation unit is not Check the state of the navigation
measuring. unit.
The navigation unit is not ON. Turn the navigation unit ON.

connected to the navigation unit. the navigation unit and the main
unit.

ARPA is not displayed. The [ARPA] key is not pressed. Press the [ARPA] key.
The ARPA setting is incorrect. Set the ARPA setting correctly.
The radar is not turned ON. Turn the radar ON.

connected to the radar. the radar and main unit.
Wind direction, wind speed The digital wind direction and air Turn the digital wind direction
(digital wind direction and air speedometer are not ON. and air speedometer ON.
speedometer) are not The connector cables are not Check the connection between
displayed. connected to the digital wind the digital wind direction and air
direction and air speedometer. speedometer.
UKC is not displayed. The depth sounder is not ON. Turn the depth sounder ON.

connected to the depth sounder. the depth sounder and the main
unit.
Engine data from data logger The data logger is not ON. Turn the data logger ON.
and weather data are not
displayed. The connector cable is not Check the connection between
connected to the data logger. the main unit and the data
logger.
Automatic sailing is not The initial setup has not been Carry out the initial setup
possible. carried out correctly. correctly.
Operation is not carried out Carry out the correct operation
correctly. referring to the Instruction
Manual.
The autopilot is not ON. Turn the autopilot ON.

connected to the autopilot. the autopilot and the main unit.

The brightness does not The lighting control circuit does Call the JRC sales
change even if the not work. representative for repair.
[BRILLIANCE] knob is turned. The cable is damaged. Call the JRC sales
None of the keys on the The cursor is displayed as an Wait until the hourglass returns
operation panel work. hourglass. to a cursor.
The operation panel circuit is Call the JRC sales
malfunctioning. representative for repair.
The trackball does not work. The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball.

The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
not work even if turned. Or, not ready for operation.
response is slow. The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft. secure the knob to the shaft.
The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and The [GAIN], [VIDEO] and Press the [RADAR] key.
[SEA/RAIN] dials do not work [SEA/RAIN] dials are not ready
even if turned. Or, response is for operation.
slow. The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to
shaft. secure the knob to the shaft.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Hard disk failure See 10.5 “User Maintenance
Planning) button is left-clicked Menu.”
in the startup menu, the
message “Path is incorrect or
Master Drive is failed” is
displayed.
The power was turned off Chart index failure Start Chart Portfolio, select
during ARCS index creation by [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Regenerate
Chart Portfolio, and Navigation Index] to create the chart index
& Planning cannot be started again.
with an error message being
displayed.

Error code (0XFFFFFFA) is Wrong authorization code was Input the proper authorization
displayed in Chart Portfolio. input. code you obtained again.
Error code (0xFFFFFF73) is Reading from CD-ROM was Clean the CD-ROM, and
displayed while ARCS chart is faulty. perform the import procedure
imported in Chart Portfolio. again. If the error persists, the
CD-ROM or CD-ROM drive may
be out of order.
Contact the distributor of the
chart to request for replacement
of CD-ROM, or contact the JRC
sales representative to request
repair of the CD-ROM drive.
When the [ ] (Navigation & Dongle (key lock device) is Call the JRC sales
Planning) button is left-clicked broken or the information of representative for repair.
in the startup menu, the Dongle and Software are not
message “ECDIS License matched.
Invalid” is displayed.
ARCS chart is not displayed. Chart is imported when the term Register the latest Chart Permit
of validity of ARCS has expired. within the expiration date, and
Chart Permit was registered then import ARCS chart.
when the term of validity of
ARCS has expired.
PIN input was canceled when Input PIN when starting
Navigation & Planning was Navigation & Planning, and
started. select ARCS chart. ([Menu] -
[Chart] - [Option] - [S57/C-MAP/
ARCS])
ARCS chart will not be Chart Permit type was changed Contact the retailer from whom
displayed, though it has been from trial version to regular ARCS was purchased to check
displayed normally by that time. contract. the details of the contract.
Details of contract were
changed.
Alarm occurs frequently while ECDIS has detected the alarm
Check the details of the alarm.
ARCS chart is displayed. information regarding ARCS
See 14.2.1 “Alarm Information of
chart itself and displayed the
ARCS Chart”.
alarm.
Error message Index was not generated in Re-generate Index in Chart
“????Earcs.dll????” is Chart Portfolio for such reasons Portfolio. ([Chart] - [ARCS] -
displayed when Navigation & as forced termination of this [Regenerate Index])
Planning is started. equipment during ARCS Index
generation.

eToken panel is displayed in Navigation & It is an authentication Press Cancel button.
Planning or Chart Portfolio, and a password is procedure when C-MAP
demanded. security device (eToken)
is accessed.
Message “C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
not found” is displayed in Navigation & (eToken) was not software and OS, and
Planning. recognized. then, press [POWER]
again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message “System detected non response from C-MAP security device Press [POWER] to exit
security device (eToken),and needs to reboot. (eToken) was not software and OS, and
Please press [POWER] button shutdown.” is recognized. then, press [POWER]
displayed in Chart Portfolio. again to start ECDIS
again.
It is not necessary to
keep [POWER] pressed
to turn off the power.
Message “Confirm CD type, and retry “Auto A CD is not inserted in Insert the chart CD into
Detect”.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio. the CD-ROM drive. the CD-ROM drive.
The CD in the CD-ROM

drive is not a chart CD.

Message “CD is not inserted, or this CD might The path setting is Set the path correctly.
have errors. Confirm, or contact with your chart wrong.
provider.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio.
C-MAP Ed.3 chart is not displayed. The eToken license is Register the latest valid
invalid. eToken license and
import C-MAP Ed.3
chart. (See 14.2.2 “Alarm
Information of C-MAP
Ed.3 Chart”.)
C-MAP Ed.3 chart that used to be displayed is The details of the Ask your C-MAP Ed.3
no longer displayed. license agreement have distributor for the details.
been changed.
“Startup Menu” is in hang-up state. C-MAP security device Install C-MAP security
(eToken) is not installed. device (eToken).
Message “error (0xFFFFFFFA)” or “Error: Bad Authorization code is Enter the received autho-
Authorization Code or file format error” is wrong. rization code again.
displayed in the log window of Chart Portfolio.
A chart list is not displayed with Chart Portfolio. Selectable Filter is set. Turn off Selectable Filter.
Message “Insert another C-MAP Ed.2 CD.” is Selected zones are not Select zones under
displayed in Chart Portfolio. under contract. contract, and import/
update data.
Message “error (0x000000xx)” is displayed in See 14.2.3 “Alarm See 14.2.3 “Alarm
the log window of Chart Portfolio. Information of S-57/S-63 Information of S-57/S-63
Chart”. Chart”.

Message “There is no licensed chart.” is This CD does not contain Insert the licensed CD
displayed in Chart Portfolio. any licensed charts. into the CD-ROM drive.
Message “Warning SA public key supplied on The selected SA Certifi- Select the SA Certificate
the ENC media unmatches the pre-installed SA cate file is incorrect. file relevant to the data
public key.” is displayed in Chart Portfolio. server.
Message “Errors occurred in Decryption! Refer Cell Permit is not Import correct Cell
the log to check the detail.” is displayed in imported yet. Permit.
Chart Portfolio.
Imported Cell Permit is
incorrect.
Cell Permit has been

deleted.
Cell Permit has already

expired.

11
After-Sales
Service
11-1
11.1 Maintenance Service
Your equipment is guaranteed for one year after it is delivered to you.
11.2 Retention Period of Repair Parts

The replacement parts for repairing this equipment (parts essential to keeping the functional integrity of
this equipment) will be retained for ten years after its production is discontinued.
11.3 When Asking for Service

When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.6 “Troubleshooting”, and check again. If
the problem still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales
department or subsidiary for advice.
In that case, use the “Repair Request Form” at the end of this manual.
• Repair during warranty period

Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and
instructions in the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge. However, breakdowns
resulting from abuse, negligence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.
• Repair after warranty period

Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the
client.
• Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number
11.4 Checks and Inspection

Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although
the rate of this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on
inspection, contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.
When you may not understand about after sales service, ask your dealer or our nearby sales department.
11 After-Sales Service 11-2

12
Disposal
12-1
Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes
on their and terminals.
Otherwise, they may short-circuit to generate heat, explode or cause a fire.
12.1 Disposal of the Product

●Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
12.2 Disposal of Used Batteries

Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
●Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
●Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the terminals with tape before
disposal. In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium
cells in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.
12.3 Disposal of LCD Module

The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you
need to observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.
If the LCD module breaks and the liquid inside spills out to stick to your
skin, wash it off immediately under running water for more than 15 minutes.
If you find any skin problem afterwards, consult a doctor immediately. If the
liquid gets in your eye, wash it off immediately under running water for more
than 15 minutes, and then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
12 Disposal 12-2
13
Specifications
13-1
13.1 Bridge Display Terminal
(1) Display 18.1 inch color LCD (JAN-701)
23.1 inch color LCD (JAN-901M)
Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (JAN-701)
Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (JAN-901M)
(2) Operation panel Keys and switches

Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick
(3) Processor CPU mother board

Video board
Level interface board
8-channel serial interface A/B board
Gyro/log interface (NSK) board
Radar overlay board
Radar interface board
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
• Silicon disk
• Hard disk (Two-set component of main and sub)
• CD-ROM drive
• Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)
(4) Environmental conditions IEC60945 Ver4.0 compliant
(5) Power voltage Voltage : AC100V to 115V/AC200V to 230V (±10%)

Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz (±5%)
(6) Power consumption 330VA or less (JAN-701)

350VA or less (JAN-901M)
13 Specifications 13-2
14
Reference
14-1
14.1 Alarm Fuction
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
Button*1 Message*2 Meaning*8 Condition*9
Alarm List - - - - - - - Always displayed. -

Green: No alarm
Red: Alarm occurred. (Blinks if not
acknowledged yet. Stays lit after
acknowledgement.)
AUTO Automatic sailing failed ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Automatic sailing cannot be continued. During automatic
By one of the following causes: sailing
• POS1 error
• GYRO error
• Route error
CALL Generated Call-back ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [A] Outputs a callback navigator alarm. During automatic
navigator By one of the following causes: sailing
• ARR alarm does not occur even after 30
seconds.
• Route alarm does not occur even after 30
seconds.
Setup Gyro initial course not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Setting up is not completed. Always
POS1 not select ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - By one of the following causes:
Safety contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Initial course for step/synchro gyro is not set.
Shallow contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Safety contour value is not set (default value
Deep contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - unchanged).
Safety depth not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Shallow contour value is not set (default
value unchanged).
• Deep contour value is not set (default value
unchanged).
• Safety depth value is not set (default value
unchanged).
A/P Autopilot failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Autopilot is defective or communication line is Autopilot is
cut. connected.
POS1 POS1 failed ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ POS1 (primary) is defective or communication Position measuring
line is cut. instrument is
✔
connected
POS1 not fix ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ POS1 is not fixed.
(including DR).
Datum is different ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Geodetic system between chart and measured Position measuring
position information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
POS2 POS2 failed ✔ 1 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS2 (secondary) is defective or Position measuring
communication line is cut. instrument is
connected
POS2 not fix ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS2 is not fixed.
(including DR).
Datum is different ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Geodetic system between chart and measured Position measuring
position information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
JUMP POS1 shifted ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ The shift amount of the primary position User setting
exceeds the limit being set.
DIFF POS1/POS2 difference ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ The difference between the primary and User setting.
exceed second positions exceeds the limit being set. Position measuring
instrument is
connected to POS2
(including DR).
GYRO Gyro failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Gyro is defective or its line is cut. Gyro is
connected.
LOG Log failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Log is defective or its line is cut. Log is
connected.
LowSp Log speed is low ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Past 30 sec with Low SPD that Log speed is During automatic
lower 2 kt than the limit (5 kt). sailing
ACC Not Acknowledge ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [A] ECC/ACC in not acknowledge after 30 During TCS route
ECC/ACC seconds of the arrival on WOL. navigation
ARR Arrived at WP ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Arrived at the WP. During Normal
route navigation
OffCo Course difference exceed ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ The difference between the course and During route
bearing exceeds the limit. navigation
XTE Cross track error exceed ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ The amount of the cross track error exceeds During route
the limit. navigation
Route Arrived at LAST WP ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ Arrived at the last WP on the sailing final leg. During route
navigation
14 Reference 14-2
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
Radar BP failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Rotation signal (BP) is out of specifications or During radar

signal line is cut. display
BZ failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Rotation signal (BZ)is out of specifications or During radar
signal line is cut. display
Trigger failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Trigger signal is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
Video failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Video signal is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
Internal error ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Error occurred in the board. During radar
display
ARPA ARPA signal failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - ARPA is defective or signal line is cut. During ARPA
display
Chart Loaded different datum ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Different datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Loaded unknown datum ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] Unknown datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Chart image is Zoom out ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] Low-resolution chart is displayed. Always
ARCS Security failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS security See 14.2.1
occurred. “Alarm Informa-
tion of ARCS
Not up to date ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS updated. Chart”.
SfCnt Crossing Safety Contour ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Safety Contour within set time. Always
AREA Crossing Traffic Separation ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone within set Vector=ON
Zone time. (User setting)
Crossing Traffic Crossing ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within set time. Alarm item=ON
Crossing Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout within set (User setting)
Roundabout time.
Crossing Precautionary ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary within set
time.
Crossing Two Way Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within set time.
Crossing Deeper Water ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Deeper Water Route within set
Route time.
Crossing Recommended ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Lane
Traffic Lane within set time.
Crossing Inshore Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone within set
Zone time.
Crossing Fairway ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Crossing Restricted Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Restricted Area within set time.
Crossing Caution Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Caution Area within set time.
CrossingOffshore ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Shore Production Area within set
Production Area time.
Crossing Military Practice ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Military Practice Area within set
Area time.
Crossing Seaplane ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area within set
Landing Area time.
Crossing Submarine transit ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Submarine transit Area within set
Area time.
Crossing Ice Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
Crossing Channel ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Channel within set time.
Crossing Fishing Ground ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fishing Ground within set time.
Crossing Fishing ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited within set time.
Prohibited
Crossing Pipeline Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set time.
Crossing Cable Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Cable Area within set time.
Crossing Anchorage Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Anchorage Area within set time.
Crossing Anchorage ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited within set
Prohibited time.
Crossing Spoil Ground ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set time.
Crossing Dumping Ground ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dumping Ground within set time.
Crossing Dredge Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dredge Area within set time.
Crossing Cargo ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment Area within
set
Transshipment Area ✔ time.
Crossing Incineration Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Incineration Area within set time.
Crossing Specially ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Specially Protected Areas within
Protected Areas set time.
Dangerous Line ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dangerous Line within set time.
Dangerous Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dangerous Area within set time.
14-3 14 Reference
List*3
Level*4
Audible*5
Output*6
Logbook
Logging*7
DNG Approaching Obstruction ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching obstruction Sector=ON

Approaching Under water ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching under-water rock (User setting)
rock
Approaching Wreck ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching wreck
Dangerous Symbol ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching wreck
Anch Dragging anchor ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ Crossing anchor circle Anchor
circle=ON
Timer Timer ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ - Time out Timer=ON
(User setting)
HARD i CPU Fan failed ✔ 1 ✔ CPU fan is defective. Always
CPU Temp rising ✔ 1 ✔ CPU temperature is rising.
Main Power supply Fan ✔ 1 ✔ Main power supply fan is defective.
failed
ATX Power supply Fan ✔ 1 ✔ ATX power supply fan is defective.
✔ ✔ -
failed
LCD Fan failed 1 ✔ LCD fan is defective.
Disk1 failed ✔ 1 ✔ Disk1 fan is defective.
Disk2 failed ✔ 1 ✔ Disk2 fan is defective.
AC offline ✔ 1 ✔ AC power is offline.
Note:
• Some of the alarms may not be available depending on the system configuration used.
14 Reference 14-4
Remarks:
*1: Button
Button that will be displayed on the display panel when an alarm occurs. By left-clicking this
button, alarm acknowledgement is made for that button alarm.
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description
of the alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the
[ALARM ACK] button on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking
alarm stops and stays lit.
The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the “Alarm
List” panel. The “Alarm List” panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked.
Alarm button [Alarm List] button
[Alarm buttons on the display panel]
Example: Setup alarm --- Initial course of the gyro is not set. Also, POS1 is not selected.
Button/panel No alarm Alarm occurred Alarm acknowledged For unused alarm

[Alarm List] button Lights in green Blinks in red Stays lit in red -
Alarm button No display Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) No display
In the message box No display Gyro initial course not No display No display
set POS1 not select
"Alarm List" Button Setup (Lights in green) Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) Inactive
panel
Description Gyro initial course not (Blinks in red.) (Stays lit in red.) Inactive
set POS1 not select Gyro initial course not Gyro initial course not
set POS1 not select set POS1 not select
*3: An alarm shown in the “Alarm List” panel.

*4: Level of alarm (1: High, 2: Mid, 3: Low)
*5: Audible sound from the equipment and dedicated keyboard (The sounding pattern varies with
the level of alarm.)
*6: Output supports serial interface and network interface.
*7: Log data recorded for playback function.
*8: [A]: Alarm used for TCS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*9: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
14-5 14 Reference
14.2 Chart-Related Alarm Information
14.2.1 Alarm Information of ARCS Chart
When ARCS chart is displayed on ECDIS, chart-related alarms may occur frequently. It is obligated to
display these alarms on ECDIS, and such frequent occurrence of the alarms is not the result of a
malfunction of ECDIS. JRC’s ECDIS is designed to read the chart and permit information of ARCS and
display such alarm information.
Timing and place of

No. Error message Measures to take
displaying error message
1 ARCS01 The contents of the GB.LCN file Ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the Displayed in Chart Portfolio
have been altered. You may be in breach authorized license (Chart Permit). Your when Navigation & Planning is
of the licensing arrangements that relate license has been falsified, so it is invalid. started, when ARCS Informa-
to the use of the chart. tion of User Maintenance
License is invalid. Please contact your Menu is checked, and when
ARCS agent/ distributor to correct this the chart is imported.
error.
2 ARCS02 Chart Chart#. Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).
3 ARCS03 Chart Chart#. Update Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
information relates to a newer version of update CD. The chart version of the when the chart is imported
the chart. Please load the chart CD that update CD does not match the imported
contain Chart# with an issue date of chart version.
RCID.
4 ARCS04 Chart Chart#. The chart data Import data from the latest chart CD and Displayed in Chart Portfolio
already incorporates this update informa- update CD. The data on the current when the chart is imported
tion. Please load the latest update CD. update CD is already imported.
5 ARCS05 Chart Chart#. License expired - Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in Chart Portfolio
updating is not permitted. Please contact Your license has already expired, so when the chart is imported
your agent to re-new license. updating is not permitted. (only for Navigator Service
Edition)
6 ARCS08 Warning - License expired in Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
less than one month. Please contact your Your license (Chart Permit) will expire in the chart is displayed (only for
ARCS agent for a license renewal. less than a month. Navigator Service Edition)
7 ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
expired. The displayed chart may not be One month has not passed yet since the the chart is displayed (only for
up to date. Contact your Agent to arrange expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
for a license renewal.
8 ARCS10 Chart Chart#. License expired. Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
ARCS charts can not be displayed. One month or more has passed since the the chart is displayed (only for
Contact your ARCS agent for a license expiry date of your license (Chart Permit). Navigator Service Edition)
renewal. The chart is not displayed.
9 ARCS11 Chart Chart#. The loaded Import the latest license and chart CD. Displayed in the panel when
version of this chart is too old to be used The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
with the license. Please load a more not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
recent version of the chart. Chart version of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is Enc#, Permit version is Penc#. is not displayed.
10 ARCS12 Chart Chart#. The license is too Ask your ARCS agent for a new license. Displayed in the panel when
old to be used with this version of the The chart encryption version number does the chart is displayed (only for
chart. Please contact your agent to obtain not match the encryption version number Navigator Service Edition)
a new license. of your license (Chart Permit). The chart
is not displayed.
11 Larger Scale available More detailed charts than the currently Displayed in the message area
displayed chart can be displayed. when the chart is displayed
Larger-scale charts than the currently
displayed chart exist.
12 Chart Shift Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The display position when the chart is displayed
of the current chart is shifted in
accordance with user-defined setting.
14 Reference 14-6
Timing and place of
displaying error message
13 Chart Shift To WGS84 Note that the currently displayed chart Displayed in the message area
position is shifted. The displayed chart is when the chart is displayed
not of the WGS-84 geodetic system, but it
is displayed in accordance with WGS-84
while the offset value of chart data is used
as reference.
14 WGS84 position cannot be related Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
accurately to chart Chart#. currently displayed chart does not when the chart is displayed
conform to WGS-84. An offset value is
not set to WGS-84, so the chart cannot be
shifted to WGS-84.
15 Loading different datum chart Note that the geodetic system of the Displayed in the message area
currently displayed chart is not WGS-84. when the chart is displayed
A chart of a non-WGS-84 geodetic system
is displayed.
16 Loaded unknown datum chart Note that the currently displayed chart is Displayed in the message area
of an unknown geodetic system. A chart when the chart is displayed
whose geodetic system is not set in chart
data is displayed.
17 PIN Error Check for the Personal Identification Displayed in the panel when a
Number (PIN). The entered PIN is not PIN is entered at start of
correct. Navigation & Planning
18 Data error(0xFFFFFF79):Chart Permit Register Chart Permit again. Chart Displayed in Chart Portfolio
corrupted. Please reload original media. Permit is in abnormal state. If the when the chart is imported
re-registration of Chart Permit does not
restore the system to normal operation,
ask your ARCS agent/distributor for the
authorized license (Chart Permit).
Note 1 : “#” in the error message column denotes a name, ID or number.

Note 2 : Two types of ARCS are available, Skipper Service and Navigator Service. Update support is
provided for the latter but not for the former. ARCS06, 07, and 13-18 pertain to Skipper Service
only.
14.2.2 Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart

This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear while C-MAP Ed.3 chart is
displayed on ECDIS.

1 C-MAP Ed.3 : No license installed. License has not yet been installed. Register the license in Chart
Portfolio.
2 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses expired. Please The license is invalid. The chart is displayed only for 15 minute
contact your C-MAP agent for a license renewal. after it is started. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license
renewal.
3 C-MAP Ed.3 : One or more licenses will expire at The license will expire on DD/MM/YYYY. It will expire in less than
DD/MM/YYYY. Please contact your C-MAP agent 2 months. Contact your C-MAP agent to request license renewal.
for a license renewal.
4 C-MAP Ed.3 : Key device (e-Token) not found. C-MAP security device (eToken) cannot be recognized. Press
[POWER] to exit the software and OS, and then, press [POWER]
again to start the equipment.
5 C-MAP Ed.3 : COM error Com port error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
6 C-MAP Ed.3 : Unknown error An unknown error was detected. Press [POWER] to exit the
software and OS, and then, press [POWER] again to start the
equipment.
14-7 14 Reference
14.2.3 Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart
This section explains the details of the alarm information that may appear inside the log window of Chart
Portfolio while S-57/S-63 chart is imported/updated on ECDIS.
When Base CD is used:

No. Error message Cause Procedure
1 error(0x00000001) A chart defined in the catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File not found file on the chart CD is not chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
2 error(0x00000002) A catalog file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File Length contains a data length error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
3 error(0x00000003) The chart CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File extention extension error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file is found on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: File count chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
5 error(0x00000005) Specified data is not found on This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Data not found the chart CD. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
error: Data error data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
7 error(0x00000007) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
8 error(0x00000008) The chart CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
error: Data structure structure error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
10 error(0x0000000A) The attribute value of an This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Attribute object defined in a chart file chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
on the chart CD is incorrect. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
11 error(0x0000000B) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address
12 error(0x0000000C) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction offset (instruction section)
13 error(0x0000000D) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule Memory rule section)
14 Reference 14-8
When Base CD is used: (continued)
14 error(0x0000000E) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.
error: PL Rule rule section)
Information
15 error(0x0000000F) Chart-object attribute Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Attribute acquisition error
Information
16 error(0x00000010) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
17 error(0x00000011) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get acquisition error
18 error(0x00000012) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
19 error(0x00000013) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
20 error(0x00000014) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Area Object Link chart CD contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
21 error(0x00000015) A line object on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Line Object Link contains a link error. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
22 error(0x00000016) A chart object on the chart This message indicates a fatal error of the chart CD. The
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart CD cannot be used for import or update processing.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
When Update CD is used:

1 error(0x00000001) Memory allocation error Contact selling agency of chart.
error: Memory get
2 error(0x00000002) Chart index acquisition error An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: Index get take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
3 error(0x00000003) SENC file is not found. An index needs to be created again. Index creation may
error: File not found take several hours.
Contact your JRC sales representative.
4 error(0x00000004) A chart file on the chart CD This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: CRC contains a CRC value error. chart cannot be updated.
5 error(0x00000005) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Exchange exchange target data error. chart cannot be updated.
6 error(0x00000006) The update CD contains a file This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure structure error. chart cannot be updated.
14-9 14 Reference
When Update CD is used: (continued)
7 error(0x00000007) A chart defined in a catalog This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data not found file on the update CD is not chart cannot be updated.
found. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
8 error(0x00000008) A SENC chart object name is This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object not found not found. chart cannot be updated.
9 error(0x00000009) SENC chart-file size Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Chart Cell size acquisition error
10 error(0x0000000A) SENC chart file acquisition Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Chart Cell data error
11 error(0x0000000B) SENC warning-file size Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Warning Cell size acquisition error
12 error(0x0000000C) SENC warning file Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Warning Cell data acquisition error
13 error(0x0000000D) The update CD contains an This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Sequential update number sequence chart cannot be updated.
number error error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
14 error(0x0000000E) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object index update CD contains an object chart cannot be updated.
index error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
15 error(0x0000000F) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
information attribute information error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
16 error(0x00000010) An update chart on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Attribute update CD contains an chart cannot be updated.
attribute value error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
17 error(0x00000011) Internal memory address Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction error (instruction section)
Address
18 error(0x00000012) Internal memory offset error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Instruction Offset (instruction section)
19 error(0x00000013) Memory allocation error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule Memory rule section)
20 error(0x00000014) Data acquisition error (PL Contact selling agency of chart.

error: PL Rule rule section)
Information
21 error(0x00000015) SENC file write error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Enc File write
22 error(0x00000016) Chart-object information Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Object Class get acquisition error
23 error(0x00000017) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Data structure data structure error. chart cannot be updated.
error: FFPC delete data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field deletion). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
14 Reference 14-10
When Update CD is used: (continued)
error: FFPC edit data structure error (FFPC chart cannot be updated.
field change). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
26 error(0x0000001A) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC delete data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
27 error(0x0000001B) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: FSPC edit data structure error (FSPC chart cannot be updated.
28 error(0x0000001C) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC delete data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
29 error(0x0000001D) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: VRPC edit data structure error (VRPC chart cannot be updated.
30 error(0x0000001E) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC delete data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
31 error(0x0000001F) The update CD contains a This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: SGCC edit data structure error (SGCC chart cannot be updated.
error: Coordinate Type data structure error chart cannot be updated.
(coordinate type). Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
33 error(0x00000021) File path error Contact selling agency of chart.

error: Directory create
34 error(0x00000022) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Topology CD contains a topology error. chart cannot be updated.
35 error(0x00000023) A chart area object on the This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
Area Object Link update CD contains a link chart cannot be updated.
error. Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
36 error(0x00000024) A chart line object on the This error is not fatal.

error: Line Object Link update CD contains a link Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
error. again. If the same error recurs, contact the chart distributor.
37 error(0x00000025) A chart object on the update This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Object outside CD is beyond the boundary. chart cannot be updated.
range Clean the CD-ROM, and perform the import processing
error: point chart point object error. chart cannot be updated.
39 error(0x00000027) Chart CD Edition number This message indicates a fatal error of the update CD. This
error: Edition number error chart cannot be updated.
14-11 14 Reference
14.3 Abbreviation for Geodetic System
No. Abbreviation Description No. Abbreviation Description
1 WGS-72 World Geodetic System 1972 56 KAN Kandawala
2 WGS-84 World Geodetic System 1984 57 KEG Kerguelen Island 1949
3 EUR European 1950 58 KEA Kertau 1948
4 ADI Adindan 59 KUS Kusaie Astro 1951
5 AFG Afgooye 60 LCF L. C. 5 Astro 1961
6 AIN Ain el Abd 1970 61 LEH Leigon
7 ANO Anna 1 Astro 1965 62 LIB Liberia 1964
8 AIA Antigua Island Astro 1943 63 LUZ Luzon
9 ARF Arc 1950 64 MIK Mahe 1971
10 ARS Arc 1960 65 MAS Massawa
11 ASC Ascension Island 1958 66 MER Merchich
12 ATF Astro beacon "E" 1945 67 MID Midway Astro 1961
13 SHB Astro DOS 71/4 68 MIN Minna
14 TRN Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 69 ASM Montserrat Island Astro 1958
15 ASQ Astronomical Station 1952 70 MPO M'Poraloko
16 AUA Australian Geodetic 1966 71 NAH Nahrwan
17 AUG Australian Geodetic 1984 72 NAP Naparima, BWI
18 PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse 73 NAS North American 1927
19 IBE Bellevue (IGN) 74 NAR North American 1983
20 BER Bermuda 1957 75 FLO Observatorio Meteorologico 1939
21 BID Bissau 76 OEG Old Egyptian 1907
22 BOO Bogota Observatory 77 OHA Old Hawaiian
23 BUR Bukit Rimpah 78 FAH Oman
24 CAZ Camp Area Astro 79 OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
25 CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969 1936
26 CAO Canton Astro 1966 80 PLN Pico de las Nieves
27 CAP Cape 81 PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967
28 CAC Cape Canaveral 82 PTB Point 58
29 CGE Carthage 83 PTN Pointe Noire 1948
30 CHI Chatam Island Astro 1971 84 POS Porto Santo 1936
31 CHU Chua Astro 85 PRP Provisional South American 1956
32 COA Corrego Alegre 86 HIT Provisional South Chilean 1963
33 DAL Dabola (also known as Hito XVIII 1963)
34 BAT Djakarta (Batavia) 87 PUR Puerto Rico
35 GIZ DOS 1968 88 QAT Qatar national
36 EAS Easter Island 1967 89 QUO Qornoq
37 EUS European 1979 90 REU Reunion
37 FOT Fort Thomas 1955 91 MOD Rome 1940
39 GAA Gan 1970 92 SAE Santo (DOS) 1965
40 GEO Geodetic Datum 1949 93 SAO Sao Braz
41 GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948 94 SAP Sapper Hill 1943
42 GUA Guam 1963 95 SCK Schwarzeck
43 GSE Gunung Segara 96 SGM Selvagem Grande 1938
44 DOB GUX 1 Astro 97 SAN South American 1969
45 HEN Herat North 98 SOA South Asia
46 HJO Hjorsey 1955 99 TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925
47 HKD Hong Kong 1963 100 TIL Timbalai 1948
48 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan 101 TOY Tokyo
49 IND Indian Indian 1954 102 TDC Tristan Astro 1968
50 INF Indian 1975 103 MVS Viti Levu 1916
51 INH Ireland 1965 104 ENW Wake-Eniwetok 1960
52 TRL ISTS 061 105 WAK Wake Island Astro 1952
53 ISG Astro 1968 106 YAC Yacare
54 IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969 107 ZAN Zanderij
55 JOH Johnston Island 1961
14 Reference 14-12
14.4 Data Formats of Files that ECDIS
can Import/Export
14.4.1 File Types
●Route files
●User chart files
●Logbook files
14.4.2 File Names

Import source file name Default export target file name
Route files ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ rtn_ (binary file name) .csv
– Normal
– TCS ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ rta_ (binary file name) .csv
– 2G TCS ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ –
User chart files ＊ .csv, ＊ . ＊ –
Logbooks – lgb_ (specified starting date_ending date) .csv
– Specified period Example: lgb_020312_020313.csv
– Selected log – lgb_ (selected log date_UTC time) .csv
Example: lgb_020312_132445.csv
14.4.3 CSV File Data Structure

●When importing files, character strings that come after “//” and until the end of the line are
handled as comments.
●Commas (,) are used as delimiters.
Example:
// SYMBOL,InstName,,,,,,
// Comment,,,,,,,
// Lat,,,Lon,,
SYMBOL,BOYSHP01,,,,
User comment,,,,,
30,6.433,N,129,35.583,E
14-13 14 Reference
14.4.3.1 Route Files
(1) Normal Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import*1 Export*2
1*3 // (Space) Fixed character string ✔

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string ✔
ECDIS.
2 // (Space) Fixed character string ✔
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character ✔
comment column/cells. You can string
edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file ✔
, Fixed character ✔
<Normal> Fixed character string ✔
Route comments Comments from the ✔
source file
WP No. Fixed character string ✔
Lat Fixed character string ✔
Lon Fixed character string ✔
Prt [nm] Fixed character ✔
Stb [nm] Fixed character ✔
Arr Rad [nm] Fixed character ✔
Speed [nm] Fixed character string ✔
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string ✔
*1 Information acquired when importing. (Same for all below)

*2 Information to be exported. (Same for all below)
*3 Lines with gray backgrounds indicate that those lines are comment lines. (Same for all below)
14 Reference 14-14
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import Export
Time Zone Fixed character string ✔

Name Fixed character string ✔
5 WP number 000 ✔ ✔
, Fixed character ✔ ✔
Latitude degree value 35 ✔ ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔ ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔ ✔
Longitude degree value 139 ✔ ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔ ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Arrival circle radius 0.50 ✔ ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔ ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔ ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔ ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Name Yokohama ✔ ✔
6 Repeat from line five for each ✔ ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with “✻✻✻”.
14-15 14 Reference
(2) TCS Routes

ROUTE SHEET exported by JRC Fixed character string ✔
ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character ✔
edit freely.
Route name Route name of source file ✔
<ANTS> Fixed character string ✔
Route comments Comments from the ✔
source file
WP No. Fixed character string ✔
Prt [nm] Fixed character ✔
Stb [nm] Fixed character ✔
Speed [nm] Fixed character string ✔
Sail (RL/GC) Fixed character string ✔
ROT [deg/min] Fixed character string ✔
Turn Rad [nm] Fixed character string ✔
14 Reference 14-16
Time Zone Fixed character string ✔

Name Fixed character string ✔
5 WP number 000 ✔ ✔
Latitude degree value 35 ✔ ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔ ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔ ✔
Longitude degree value 139 ✔ ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔ ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔ ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔ ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔ ✔
Turning rate 10.00 ✔ ✔
Turn circle radius 0.50 ✔ ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔ ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔ ✔
Name Yokohama ✔ ✔
6 Repeat from line five for each ✔ ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (degree value, minute value and code)
are filled with “✻✻✻”.
14-17 14 Reference
(3) 2G TCS Routes
Line Contents Examples, etc. Import
1 ; Fixed character
(Space) x 63 characters Fixed character string
2 WP number 000 ✔
Latitude degree value 3535.123 ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔
Longitude degree value 13948.234 ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔
Port side route width 0.50 ✔
Starboard side route width 0.50 ✔
Arrival circle radius 0.50 ✔
Planned speed 12.30 ✔
Navigation method (RL/GC) RL ✔
Turning rate 010.0 ✔
Turning circle radius 0.50 ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔
Name Yokohama ✔
3 Repeat from line second for each ✔
waypoint.
• In the WP000 line, all fields other than latitude and longitude (numeric values and codes) are ignored.
14 Reference 14-18
14.4.3.2 User Chart Files
(1) Header Records
1 // (Space) Fixed character string

USER CHART SHEET exported Fixed character string
by JRC ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // indicate Variable length character
edit freely.
User chart name File name of the source file
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
User chart comments Comments from the
source file
14-19 14 Reference
(2) Object Records
a) Symbols
m // (Space) Fixed character string

SYMBOL Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
+1 // (Space) Fixed character string
Comment Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Lon Fixed character string
+3 SYMBOL Fixed character string ✔
Instruction name - 1 Instruction name ✔
+4 Comments Comments ✔
+5 Latitude degree value 35 ✔
Latitude minute value 35.123 ✔
Latitude code (N/S) N ✔
Longitude degree value 139 ✔
Longitude minute value 48.234 ✔
Longitude code (E/W) E ✔
• Unused instruction name fields are filled with “✻✻✻”.
14 Reference 14-20
b) (Poly) Lines

LINE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
InstName Fixed character string
Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Add “END” to the end of vertex. Fixed character string
+3 LINE Fixed character string ✔
Instruction name Instruction name ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35 ✔
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123 ✔
Latitude code of the apex (N/S) N ✔
Longitude degree value of the 139 ✔
apex
Longitude minute value of the 48.234 ✔
apex
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E ✔
+n Repeat for the number of apexes ✔
plus five lines
END Fixed character string ✔
(position end)
• For lines without instructions, fill in the instruction name field with “✻✻✻”.
• When importing, attributes that are not specified here are imported with specific attributes.
14-21 14 Reference
c) Arc

ARC Fixed character string
Base Point-Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Base Point-Lon Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 ARC Fixed character string ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the 35 ✔
reference position
Latitude minute value of the 35.123 ✔
reference position
Latitude code of the reference N ✔
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
Longitude code of the reference E ✔
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
14 Reference 14-22
Starting angle 120.0 ✔

Ending angle 180.0 ✔
14-23 14 Reference
d) User Danger Lines

DANGER_LINE Fixed character string
+2 Lat Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_LINE Fixed character string ✔
+5 Latitude degree value of the apex 35 ✔
Latitude minute value of the apex 35.123 ✔
apex
apex
Longitude code of the apex (E/W) E ✔
+n Repeat for the number of apexes ✔
plus two lines
(position end)
14 Reference 14-24
e) Polygons

POLYGON Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 POLYGON Fixed character string ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex
Longitude code of the apex E ✔
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of ✔
apexes plus two lines
(position end)
14-25 14 Reference
f) Circles

CIRCLE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 CIRCLE Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
14 Reference 14-26
g) Ellipses

ELLIPSE Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Horizontal Radius [nm] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
Vertical Radius [nm] Fixed character string
+3 ELLIPSE Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Horizontal radius 2.00 ✔
Vertical radius 1.50 ✔
14-27 14 Reference
h) Fans

FAN Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Start Angle [deg] Fixed character string
, Fixed character
End Angle [deg] Fixed character string
+3 FAN Fixed character string ✔
reference position
reference position
position (N/S)
reference position
reference position
position (E/W)
Radius 2.0 ✔
Starting angle 120.0 ✔
Ending angle 180.0 ✔
14 Reference 14-28
i) User Danger Areas

DANGER_AREA Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
+3 DANGER_AREA Fixed character string ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex
(E/W)
+n Repeat for the number of ✔
apexes plus two lines
(position end)
14-29 14 Reference
j) Text

TEXT Fixed character string
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
, Fixed character
Rotation Fixed character string
+3 TEXT Fixed character string ✔
Text Fast current. Caution. ✔
apex
apex
apex
apex
(E/W)
Rotation angle 123 ✔
Font size 14 ✔
14 Reference 14-30
14.4.3.3 Logbook File

LOGBOOK SHEET exported by Fixed character string ✔
JRC ECDIS.
<<NOTE>>This strings // Variable length character ✔
indicate comment column/cells. string
You can edit freely.
3 No Fixed character string ✔
Date Fixed character string ✔
Time Fixed character string ✔
Event Fixed character string ✔
POS1 Fixed character string ✔
POS2 Fixed character string ✔
COG (˚) Fixed character string ✔
SOG (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Heading (˚) Fixed character string ✔
Log (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Av.Speed 4h (kt) Fixed character string ✔
Av.Speed 24h (kt) Fixed character string ✔
14-31 14 Reference
Voyage Dist. (G)(nm) Fixed character string ✔

Voyage Dist. (W)(nm) Fixed character string ✔
Charts Fixed character string ✔
Set (˚) Fixed character string ✔
Drift (kt), Fixed character string ✔
Wind Dir. (˚), Fixed character string ✔
Wind Speed (m/sec) Fixed character string ✔
Wave Height (m) Fixed character string ✔
Air Press (hPa) Fixed character string ✔
Temp. (˚C) Fixed character string ✔
Water Temp. (˚C) Fixed character string ✔
Engine Rev. (r/min) Fixed character string ✔
Comment Fixed character string ✔
4 Number 0001 ✔
, ✔
Date (LMT) 2002/04/09 ✔
, ✔
Time (LMT) 08:45:24 ✔
Time zone 09:00 ✔
Time zone code (E/W) E ✔
, ✔
Event type Specified time ✔
, ✔
POS1 name GPS1 ✔
, ✔
POS2 name GPS2 ✔
, ✔
14 Reference 14-32
Latitude degree value for POS1 35 ✔
, ✔
Latitude minute value for POS1 35.123 ✔
, ✔
Latitude code for POS1 (N/S) N ✔
, ✔
Longitude degree value for 139 ✔
POS1
, ✔
Longitude minute value for 48.234 ✔
POS1
, ✔
Longitude code for POS1 (E/W) E ✔
, ✔
Course relative to land 123.4 ✔
, ✔
Ship speed relative to land 12.3 ✔
, ✔
Bow heading 123.5 ✔
, ✔
Ship speed relative to water 12.4 ✔
, ✔
Average ship speed for last four 12.0 ✔
hours
, ✔
Average ship speed for last 24 13.2 ✔
hours
, ✔
Total distance relative to land 12345.5 ✔
, ✔
Total distance relative to water 12300.6 ✔
, ✔
Chart name that caused the JP34OBJ ✔
event
, ✔
Set 123.4 ✔
, ✔
Drift 12.4 ✔
, ✔
Wind direction 234.5 ✔
, ✔
Wind speed 10.3 ✔
, ✔
Wave height 2.0 ✔
, ✔
14-33 14 Reference
Atmospheric pressure 1003 ✔

, ✔
Air temperature 23.4 ✔
, ✔
Water temperature 20.3 ✔
, ✔
Engine revolutions 135.6 ✔
, ✔
Comments Comments ✔
n Repeat four lines for the number ✔
of events.
14 Reference 14-34
Index
A D
Abbreviation for Geodetic System........................ 14-12 Danger detection vector..........................................3-85
Abort......................................................................... 3-7 Deleting system chart .............................................8-92
Accepting S-57 updating chart ............................... 3-68 Depth alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..........................3-124
Adjusting datum (ARCS Only)................................ 3-62 Display alarm history ..............................................3-28
Adjusting radar image ([RADAR]) .......................... 3-29 Display area..............................................................2-5
After-sales service.................................................. 11-2 Display panel ......................................................2-5,2-7
AIS symbols ......................................................... 3-142 Displaying note and diagram (ARCS Only).............3-60
Alarm function ........................................................ 14-2 Displaying playback panel ........................................9-8
Alarm Information of C-MAP Ed.3 Chart ................ 14-7 Displaying user chart ..............................................3-67
Alarm Information of S-57/S-63 Chart .................... 14-8 Disposal..................................................................12-2
Alarm list panel....................................................... 3-26 Drawing area (user chart) .......................................5-32
Alternate route editing mode .................................. 4-58 Drawing lines (user chart).......................................5-29
ARCS chart display (ARCS Only) .......................... 3-55
ARCS PIN .............................................................. 3-19 E
ARPA symbols...................................................... 3-142 EBL/VRM 2-step operation .....................................3-97
ARPA/AIS list ......................................................... 3-32 EBL/VRM using operation panel.............................3-88
ARPA/AIS target display ON/OFF([AIS/ARPA])...... 3-31 Editing operations (C-MAP Ed.2)............................8-92
Auto sailing status panel ........................................ 2-11 Entering symbols (user chart).................................5-25
Automatic sailing ...................................................... 6-4 Entering text (user chart) ........................................5-36
Automatic sailing system.......................................... 6-2 Event mark (EVENT) ..............................................3-69
Azimuth mode ...................................................... 3-106
F
B Features ...................................................................1-3
Bearing setting ......................................................... 7-9 File manager.............................................................7-3
Brightness (Adjustment) ......................................... 3-21 Filtering source chart ..............................................8-93
Flowchart (Alternate route) .....................................4-56
C Flowchart (For sailing) ............................................3-15
Changing active panel............................................ 3-58 Flowchart (General flow).........................................3-14
Changing display color ([DAY/NIGHT]) .................. 3-24 Flowchart (Graphic editor) ......................................4-34
Changing object category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....... 3-45 Flowchart (Table editor) ..........................................4-13
Chart display area .................................................... 2-5 Flowchart (User chart file).........................................5-9
Chart editing menu ................................................... 5-4 Function of operation panel ......................................2-2
Chart panel............................................................... 2-8 Function of screen ....................................................2-5
Chart portfolio........................................................... 8-2
Chart symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only) ........................ 3-121 G
Chart-Related Alarm Information............................ 14-6 Graphic editing menu .............................................4-29
COG vector ............................................................ 3-84 Graphic editing mode .....................................4-28,4-36
Color pattern (S-57)................................................ 10-5 Gray Scale..............................................................10-6
Color test (ARCS Only) .......................................... 7-11 Guard ring...............................................................3-85
Components ............................................................. 1-4
Connection ............................................................... 7-7 H
Construction ............................................................. 1-7 HDG vector.............................................................3-84
Coordinated universal time (UTC)........................ 3-145 Heading line............................................................3-84
Creating alternate route.......................................... 4-56 Highlighting.............................................................3-73
Creating route using EBL/VRM keys and dials....... 4-53
CSV format............................................................. 4-26 L
Cursors..................................................................... 3-3 Left-click ...................................................................3-3
Local mean time (LMT).........................................3-145
1/2 Index
Logbook ............................................................... 3-113 Selecting ROUTE ...................................................3-39
Selecting S-57/C-MAP chart ...................................3-66
M Selecting startup menu ...........................................3-18
Maneuver curve ................................................... 3-102 Selecting To WP .....................................................3-39
Manual update ....................................................... 5-18 Setting alarm options ............................................3-135
Marking information mark....................................... 3-71 Setting ARPA/AIS options.....................................3-140
Marking tidal stream mark ...................................... 3-72 Setting chart options ............................................. 3-118
Menu operation ........................................................ 3-3 Setting date/time...................................................3-145
Menu title bar ................................................... 2-5,2-12 Setting logbook options ........................................ 3-116
Menu tree .....................................2-12,4-9,4-29,5-4,9-3 Setting radar options ............................................3-139
Merging user charts................................................ 5-16 Setting scales .......................................................3-134
Motion mode ........................................................ 3-106 Shifting chart...........................................................3-47
Multi view screen.................................................... 3-78 Shifting own ship position .....................................3-146
My port list.............................................................3-111 Ship's shape ...........................................................3-83
Sound volume (Adjustment) ...................................3-21
N Specifications..........................................................13-2
Names and Functions .............................................. 2-3 Speed setting............................................................7-9
Navigation & Planning screen ................................ 3-20 Startup screen ........................................................3-19
Navtex mark ......................................................... 3-117 Switching range (S-57/C-MAP Only) ......................3-53
Navtex message .................................................. 3-117 Switching scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................3-54
North arrow mark ..................................................... 2-5 System configuration ..............................................1-13
Numerical input ...................................................... 3-12 System restoration in case of abnormal operations 3-37
O T
Over-scale alarm .................................................... 3-52 Table editing menu ...................................................4-9
Table editing mode ...........................................4-8,4-15
P Temporary and preliminary notice (ARCS Only) .....3-61
Panel display of ARPA/AIS target........................... 3-36 Time label display ...................................................3-86
Playback................................................................... 9-2 Track display...........................................................3-86
Power OFF............................................................. 3-21 Trackball ...................................................................3-3
Power ON............................................................... 3-17 Troubleshooting .................................................... 10-11
Primary position ....................................................... 7-8
Printing display..................................................... 3-149 U
User chart edit mode ........................................5-3,5-11
R Using analog meter ................................................3-81
Reading out information on the objects .................. 3-75 Using shortcut menu.................................................3-7
Release alarm ([ALARM ACK]) .............................. 3-25
Right-click................................................................. 3-3 W
Route monitoring and system alarm......................... 6-3 Wide view screen (S-57/C-MAP Only)....................3-80
Route name and extention of file.............................. 4-2
Route options ........................................................... 4-4 Z
Route planning ......................................................... 4-2 Zooming area using rubber band
Route planning using graphic editor ....................... 4-28 (S-57/C-MAP Only).......................................3-51
Route planning using table editor ............................. 4-8 Zooming in/out........................................................3-52
Running fix ........................................................... 3-101
S
Secondary position................................................... 7-8
Selecting all source charts ..................................... 8-92
Selecting high resolution area (ARCS Only) .......... 3-55
Selecting high resolution chart (ARCS Only).......... 3-59
Selecting low resolution chart (ARCS Only) ........... 3-59
Selecting menu ........................................................ 3-3
Index 2/2
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR JAN-701/901M SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE
IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement (“EULA”) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Japan
Radio Co., Ltd. (“JRC”) for the JRC ECDIS equipment that includes Microsoft
software products.
● You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by JRC from Microsoft
Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
●IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN
OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
●GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
¾ You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
¾ NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS
RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
¾ NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all
faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCUARACY,
AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR
AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE
DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
¾ Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java
technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as
online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct
life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead
directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems,
Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
¾ No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS
OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
¾ Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
¾ SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer
rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
¾ EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Repair Request Form
Date : . . .
To:
Mr/Ms
Reading
TEL
Point of
Repair
Contact
Requested by FAX
〒－
Address
Ship's Name Port Name
Product Name Product No.
Symptom: (in as much detail as possible)

Date of Malfunction: Malfunction Location:
(yyyy.mm.dd)
Desired Repair Repair On Site/ Desired
Method Repair at JRC Office Repair Date . . .
JAN-701/901M
ECDIS
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
For further information,contact:
Not use the asbestos
URL http://www.jrc.co.jp
Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : tmsc@jrc.co.jp
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
e-mail : service@jrcams.nl
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
e-mail : service@jrcamerica.com
CODE No.7ZPNA0513B 01ETM ISO 9001, Certified
9001，ISO 14001 Certified
JAN. 2007 Edition 3 JRC Printedin
Printed in Japan
Japan

JAN-701-901 Instruction Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAN-701-901 Instruction Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAN-701-901 Instruction Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAN-701/901M

For further information,contact:

Not use the asbestos

Precautions for Rescue of Victim of

☆Precautions for First-Aid Treatments

(5) (a) Feel the patient's pulse.

Meouth-to-mouth artificial respiration with the patient's head lifted

③ (3) Blowing air into the patient's lungs.

Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouth artificial respiration

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-701/901M ECDIS.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be

Examples of pictorial indication

The mark represents prohibition.

The ● mark represents instruction.

Never remove the cover of this equipment.

Do not attempt to disassemble or tamper with this equipment.

Do not use the offset function during navigation.

Never attempt to check or repair the inside of the equipment.

Before disposing of used lithium batteries, insulate them by applying tapes on

Do not block the ventilation opening of the equipment.

This equipment is intended for use as an aid to navigation only.

● Do not place any object on the operation panel.

If checking of the equipment is unavoidably necessary, be sure to turn off the

Stand-alone type (JAN-701M)

AIS : Automatic Identification System

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service. A raster chart published by UKHO.

ARPA : Automatic RADAR Plotting Aid. Collision prevention radar.

Base CD : Chart CD containing a complete chart data.

C-MAP Ed.2 : C-MAP Edition 2. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP Ed.3 : C-MAP Edition 3. A digital chart format by C-MAP Norway.

C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C-MAP Norway.

CO. TO STEER : Course to steer. Heading command.

COG : Course Over Ground

Data Server : Organization providing S-63 chart.

Display : Screen displayed on the LCD.

EBL : Electronic Bearing Lines

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic Navigation Chart. Meaning S-57 and S-63.

ETA : Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD : Estimated Time of Departure

F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

HDG : Ship’s heading

Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department:

Leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local Mean Time

Primary : Main positioning sensor.

Rubber band : Border that indicates the selected range.

S-57 : IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data.

S-63 : IHO Data Protection Scheme

Scale : The display scale.

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

SOG : Speed Over Ground

Spot depth : Numeric representation of depth.

TCS : Track control systems

UKHO : United Kingdom Hydrographic Office

UTC : Coordinated Universal Time

VRM : Variable Range Markers